Home

User Manual - Computer Magic

1. 3 Scroll down the list of Teams Admins and Users in the selection box and click on the directory of the team you wish to assign permissions to Click on the check mark icon to the right of the list SELECT FILES Teams E autoinstall exchangeitadmin log test_test 4 The Modify File Permissions screen displays showing the current permissions for that directory Folders in webmaster Users Teams RESET PERMISSIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 94 File Services 5 Modify the team s permissions by clicking on the radio buttons Read Only Read Write and None Click on the check mark button in the Action column to save the permissions that have been set Please Note To reset a team s permissions level to default settings click on the Reset Permissions button at the bottom of the screen This will reset all permission for all contents including sub folders of the team s directory 6 To view the permissions of all users assigned to that team click on the Plus symbol to the left of the team name in the Modify File Permissions section This will expand the team list and show all users within that team as well as their permission levels Please Note The expanded rows cannot be modified they are for informational purposes only Folders in webmaster Users Teams cgi bin log AAAA MODIFY FILE PERMISSIONS ENEN a NENNEN EMEN Use d niy e None None EJ None E
2. Save password Phone number fi 555 1231234 Dialing from New Location j Dial Properties teen 9 A window showing you the progress of the connection displays 10 The following icon showing traffic between your workstation and the Nitix powered server you are connected to displays in the bottom right corner of your screen when you are connected to the local network 5 12 38 PM Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 220 Remote Access Services 11 To terminate the connection double click on the icon Select Disconnect in the window that displays Terminating a Connection from WebConfig When a user dials into the Nitix powered server their username will appear in the Internet Status section of WebConfig s System Status screen for the duration of the connection The administrator can choose to terminate the user s connection from this screen 221 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 Remote Access Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 222 EITHER Firewall Services Nitix s firewall subsystem is entirely auto configuring and automatically reconfigures its parameters to adapt to any Nitix server settings There are no user controls needed How ever you can choose to restrict outgoing traffic and view a log of all requests to traverse the firewall To learn more about just how sophisticated the firewall is you can read a technical paper about it at http www net i
3. 7 Once you have received the new certificate from your Certificate Authority copy and paste it into the X 509 Certificate box 509 CERTIFICATE BEGIN CERTIFICATE MIIC TCCAmKgAwIBAgIEdOYMADANBgkghkiG9WOBAQUFADCHBJDELMAKGALUEBMNC VVMxE j AQOBgNVBAgGTCUFueSBTdGFOZTERMASGA1UEBxMIQWSSIFRvdZ 4xFDASBgNV BAoTCOFCOyBDb21wYUSS5MRowGAYDVOODExFhYrmMudZzVhdrmVybmVvOLm51bDEKkMCIG CognmSJomTSixkARkWFHlvdXJlbWFpbEBkbZihalU4uYZOtMB4XDTAzMTEyNjE3MDKx MVoXDTEzMTEyMzE3MDkxMVowgYwxCzAJBgNVBAYTAlVTMRIvEAYDVQOIEwlBbnkg U3RhdGUXxETAPBgNVBACTCEFueSBUb3duMRQwvEgYDVOOKEwtBQOkMgQ2 9t cGFueTEa MBgGA1UEAxMRYWJjLndlYXZlcm5ldC5udUwxJDAiBgoJKiaJk IsZAEZFhR5b3Vy ZWihaWUxAZzG9tYWluLrimNvbTCBnzANBgkqhkiG9wO0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEAw Kg 61YeYqHgUa8YatfgZRZdgIpRSDYK3todg6q 3UFsnvLjZcmspYquBmZi1Ki9GlKKl nsXfqkb980vmoO61gW2No0c4Uc99ccfsTT jKD10jceWdtJRCDSH2Z12FcKOTOPt PfYcbK4ZK600EeBqoZ 4vHf jJXI Zq4B8208jUpUCAvEAAaNmMGQuEQYJYIZIAYb4 QgEBBAQDAgZAMCAGCUCGSAGG MEIBDAQTFhFhYmMud2VhdnVybmVOLm51bDAOBgNV HOBBAfSEBAMCAqQwHQYDVROlBBYwFAYIKwYBBQUHAVEGCCSGAQUFBwHCMAOGCSqG SIb3DQEBBQUAA4GBAKQ2rEJmVrCxUyj704hCnrLCIOQFFvgVVBF j49WU60ULjegsr vlheejHzdCbDqvOrRfhziWUxBFHETi1GK ZSO0CdqJnTPpe 9wRMAKk6DzXbI3XpSbPx 7W2RVqboHoEBVhBOFhxvoyc4TVZB uSYd7dmHD 4Uug62Z7X 3mD Beb nvd2 W _ REPLACE CERTIFICATE 8 Click on the Replace Certificate button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 166 Web Services Web Caching In order to improve bandwidth Nitix can temporarily store we
4. The primary disk is in standalone mode If you remove the disk you will lose access to your files This message displays if have a single disk drive if you are not using RAID or if your two disk RAID array is in degraded mode There is no disk available for idb backup This message displays when all available disks are configured in a RAID array Disk _is being used for Intelligent Disk Backup idb This message displays when the last disk is used for idb instead of as part of a RAID array You can add disk _ to your RAID array to improve redundancy This message displays when you have at least one un configured disk or if your last disk is being used for idb Click on the link to add the disk to the RAID array Please Note This message appears in addition to messages 1 7 You can configure disk _ for use in idb backups This message displays if the last disk drive is un configured The previous message also displays but you can only choose one of the options Please Note This message appears in addition to messages 1 7 Recovering from Disk Failure If one of the disks in your RAID array fails 1 2 Turn off the main power Remove the hard disk and replace it with a new one as soon as possible See nstalling a New Hard Drive in this chapter for more information Turn the main power switch back on Press the power button Connect to WebConfig a Read the IP address on the display panel console For
5. ADD NEW USER ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY 2 Click on the Password Policy button at the bottom of the screen The Password Policy screen displays PASSWORD POLICY Enforce password policy even when set by admin Passwords must contain letters Passwords must contain mumbers i Passwords must contain punctuation Passwords must contain both upper and lowercase letiers Nl SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T 3 Choose whether you wish to enforce the Password Policy for administrators Please Note The Password Policy settings are always enforced for regular users If this option is enabled the Password Policy settings will also be enforced for admin users Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 83 User amp Team Management 4 Select which Password Policy criteria should be enforced by checking off the appropriate boxes i e Passwords must contain letters 5 If you wish to enforce a minimum password length enter the number of characters in the Password minimum length text box 6 Click on the Save Changes button The main User Setup page re displays Please Note The Passwords must contain letters and Passwords must contain both upper and lower case letters rules are independent of each other Therefore you only need to select one or the other not both Illegal Passwords The Password Policy will only affect users when they change their password in WebCo
6. Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 262 MySQL Server 10 From the Windows Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel gt ODBC Data Source The ODBC Data Source Administrator screen displays User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Add Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xls Remove FoxPro Files Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf MS Access 97 Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Configure MySQL Address Book MySQL sample MySQL MySQL Text Files Microsoft Text Driver tst csv the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to and can only be used on the current machine Cancel Analy Help 11 Click on the Add button The Create New Data Source screen displays 12 Select MySQL from the list Click on the Finish button The following screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 263 MySQL Server TDX mysql Driver default configuration po SEE Zn I immmmmmmmm TTIITITT TI 13 On this screen enter a Windows DSN Name such as MySQL Address Book your Nitix powered server s host name or IP address e your MySQL database name user name and password Please Note You do not have to worry about the other fields on this screen 14 Click OK o
7. Ifthis is set to Only as last resort Nitix will create a default route to the network through this interface with a lower priority level so it will be used only if your higher priority Yes links stop working 9 Click on the Save Changes button Network Routes The Network Routes section of the screen displays the IP routes known to Nitix Because Nitix automatically discovers its network surroundings and sets up routing tables you gener ally do not need to edit them However depending on your Internet connection your ISP may assign you a new route in which case you have to edit the default route Please Note Whether or not you have to change any route settings depends on your network setup and Nitix s connection to the LAN and to the Internet Deleting Network Routes 1 Click on the appropriate route s Delete button 2 In the window that appears confirm the deletion by clicking on the Ok button Please Note If the server prevents the route from being deleted the server deems the route as required or important as it must relate to another setting or subnet in your Device list If you con tinue to have issues review FAQs for a Netscan option or contact support Editing Network Routes 1 Click on the appropriate route s Action button The following screen displays MODIFY ROUTE ERSTEN 192 168 12 0 24 Interface SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 54
8. 8 ColorSync Displays Energy Saver Keyboard Mouse Sound Internet amp Network ees Internet Network QuickTime Sharing System 9 G 9 B 2 Classic Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Users Update Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 36 Connecting to WebConfig 2 Click on the Network icon The Network screen displays eo Network oO mOtE Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic A Show Built in Ethernet m Proxies AppleTalk Configure Using DHCP r3 Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 12 8 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Search Domains Router 192 168 12 1 Conon DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 03 93 15 59 aa aer o Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply Now 3 Select Automatic for location Select Built in Ethernet for connection In the TCP IP tab select the DHCP configuration 4 Click on the Apply Now button 5 Ifthe Internet connection doesn t function immediately reboot your computer Creating an Administrator Account At this point the Nitix powered server should have an IP address your workstation should have TCP IP configured and both your Nitix server and your workstation should be con nected to the LAN You now need to create an Administrator account 1 Open an Internet browser on your workstati
9. All rights reserved Feel free to use this as you want for commercial or non commercial use but no warranty is provided Use at your own risk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 385 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 386 Appendix AC RSA License Copyright ORSA Data Security Inc All rights reserved License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referenc ing this software or this function License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are iden tified as derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MDS Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work RSA Data Security Inc makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or soft ware Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 387 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 388 Appendix AD SSLeay License Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Nets
10. Configuring Nitix 2 Optional Enter a new destination IP address and netmask in the format 192 168 12 0 24 3 Optional Click on the Interface drop down arrow and select the interface over which this network can be accessed 4 Optional If this is not a local network route entry i e eth or eth2 enter the network s gateway address MODIFY ROUTE Diu 0 0 0 0 Interface TEA OEA 64 119 101 41 SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 5 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 55 Configuring Nitix Network Configuration Scenarios 1 Nitix powered server as a Workgroup Server without a direct connection to the Internet Hub Switch Nitix powered server In this scenario you would go to the Advanced Network Settings screen to change the IP address or the network mask of the local network interface or Nitix s default route Although you generally do not need to change these settings you can still do so a Inthe Network Devices or Network Routes section of the Advanced Network Settings screen click on the appropriate Action button b Depending on your choice the Modify Route or the Network Settings screen displays Please Note Refer to Reconfiguring Network Devices and Editing Network Routes earlier in this chapter for full descriptions of these two screens MODIFY ROUTE Destination Interface SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Network Sett
11. Data Encryption Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL uses standard phone lines to deliver high speed data communications ADSL uses the por tion of a phone line s bandwidth not utilized by voice allowing for simultaneous voice and data transmission This term describes information carrying capacity of telephone or network wiring Bandwidth is usually measured in bits per second Binary Digit The smallest unit of computerized data A bit is represented as either 1 or 0 Cable modems provide Internet access over cable TV networks which use fiber optic or coaxial cables They are generally much faster than modems that use phone lines A copy of a program or data that is used for faster access See also Web Cache An issuer of Security Certificates used in SSL connections See also SSL A computer system or process that requests a service from another computer system or process Encrypting data is accomplished by applying a scrambling code that makes the data unreadable to anyone who does not have a decryption key Authorized personnel with access to this key can unscramble it Data encryption is a useful tool against malicious users Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 411 DHCP Disk Quota DNS DDNS DNS Server DSL Ethernet EtherTalk FastForward Firewall Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol This is an industry standard protocol that assigns IP information to computers Disk Quota defi
12. Select any entries in the Default gateways section of the window and click on the Remove button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 33 Connecting to WebConfig 10 Click on the DNS tab Select any entries in the DNS server addresses section of the win dow and click on Remove Select Append primary and connection specific DNS suffixes Select Append parent suffixes and primary DNS suffixes 11 Click on the WINS tab Select any entries in the WINS addresses section of the window and click on Remove Select the Default NetBios setting 12 Click on OK Click on the OK button on the TCP IP Properties screen 13 Reboot your computer For Mac OS 9 1 Click on the Apple icon in the top menu bar Select Control Panel gt TCP IP File Edit View Window Special Help Jl AirPort D Apple System Profiler H Calculator D Chooser M Control Panels Appearance f Favorites Apple Menu Options 2 Key Caps AppleTalk Network Browser Colorsync x Control Strip amp j Quicken com Date amp Time Recent Applications gt pialAssist A Recent Documents gt Energy Saver amp Recent Servers gt Extensions Manager ir Remote Access Status File Exchange Scrapbook File Sharing amp Screen snapz General Controls Internet 49 Sherlock 2 Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Snapz Pro So
13. Table AddressBook has been altered SQL query Edit Create PHP Code ALTER TABLE AddressBook ADD E mail VARCHAR 20 NOT NULL John ADD Phone VARCHAR 13 NOT NULL T AddressBook John 1 Structure Browse SQL Search Insert Export Operations Empty Drop Field Type Attributes Null Default Extra Action Name varchar 20 No a uustsim E mail varchar 20 No a wuusm Phone varchar 13 No i w uu E mu L Check All Uncheck Al With selected AW Indexes Documentation Space usage Row Statistic Type Usage Statements Value No index defined Data 0 Bytes Format dynamic Index 1 024 Bytes Rows 0 1 Go Sicar Oon columns Ge Total 1 024 Bytes Creation Oct 01 2004 at 03 34 PM Tactundate Net Ml INNA at 2 34 PM 11 On this screen you can insert values edit entries and delete entries To insert values for an entry click on the nsert button at the top of the screen Enter the appropriate information into the Value field To edit an entry click on the Browse button at the top of the screen Click on the Edit icon beside the entry that you want to edit Enter the appropriate information into the Value field When you are finished click on the Go button at the bottom of the page To delete an entry click on the Browse button at the top of the screen Click on the Delete icon beside the entry that you want to delete and then click on the Yes button on the page that display
14. _logon bat and a new file called logon bat will be created The new logon bat file will link to your _logon bat file Automated Drive Mapping User folders and team folders can be automatically mounted through the selection of a drive mount in the User Team setup These drive mappings are done through the Logon scripts Note that any drives previously mounted will not be automatically disconnected as Windows caches these drive connections Workstation Administrative Rights With Nitix version 3 75 or higher a domain admins team is automatically created when Nitix becomes a domain controller Administrators can add users to the domain admins team to give them workstation administrative rights to all computers running Windows on the network Users will have full control over workstation administration without giving them access to other server administrator functions To Give Users Workstation Administrative Rights 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main User Setup screen displays 2 Add any users to the domain admins team that you want to grant access to workstation administrative features Please Note See Chapter 7 User amp Team Management for instructions on how to create a team 3 The next time that user logs in to the domain they will have workstation administrative rights Please Note When you import users from a Windows NT domain those users will
15. d 8 Mouse Multimedia ODBC PC Card PCMCIA Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 106 NT Domain Services 2 Select Network from the list The Network window displays Click on the Identification tab Meetiication Services Protocois Adapts Bindings this computer and the workgroup or doman that wil copes in Computer Name TESTMACHINE SSS apes poe row 3 Click on the Change button The dentification Changes window displays Windows utet the following information to identify your computer on the revoca mary charge the raster Lor the comgader Ihm workgroup or domain that wil appear in and ceste computer occur nthe doman d speci Computer Name Member 000 C wokgoux pow umont F Creste a Comeuter Account in the Domain This option will create an account on the domain for this computer You must speediy a user accourt with the abiiy to add workstation to the speciied domain above WeNme ot bat fT ET 4 Inthe Member of section ofthe window select Domain Enter the name of the domain as entered in the Windows workgroup name field on the File Server Setup WebConfig screen 5 Check the box for Create a Computer Account in the Domain Enter the administrative username root and the password as entered in the Domain Controller Password field on the File Server Setup WebConfig screen 6 Click on the OK button The Net
16. links to the set of top level domains such as com and org In turn each of the top level domains contains a link to each of the second level domains such as net itech com and mydomain org Third and fourth level domains are less common and are used in large organizations like universities You will most likely publish a second level domain name such as example com When you do that your DNS server if enabled automatically publishes the names inside exam ple com such as www example com and mail example com Domain Registrars However there is still a part that must be done manually in this example you have to create a link on the com server to ask your second level domain to be referred to your Nitix pow ered server s IP address To do this you need to visit a Domain Registrar such as www easydns com Orwww opensrs org to make sure your domain name isn t already being used by someone else and give them the outside IP address of your Nitix powered server Please Note In order to register a domain name your Nitix powered server must have a static IP address Most ISPs provide this service for an additional fee DDNS can be used in place of a static IP address Refer to Dynamic DNS in this chapter for more information After you enable your Public DNS Server and register with a Domain Registrar people should be able to look up the IP address associated with your domain name To test this select WWW from the Server Setup
17. Copyright Branko Lankester lt branko hacktic nl gt Copyright Ulrich Pegelow lt pegelow moorea uni muenster de gt Copyright Michael Elizabeth Chastain lt mec duracef shout net gt Copyright Rick Sladkey lt jrs world std com gt Copyright Wichert Akkerman lt wakkerma deephackmode org gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
18. The rsync server must be enabled using WebConfig The option is located in the LOCAL configuration page From the remote unix system you need to mount your home directory as follows mount t nfs server export home username tmp username This will mount the username home directory from the Nitix server to the destination directory of tmp username This has to be done as the root user on the remote unix system To access the directory that was just mounted the userid uid has to match for the user that is accessing the directory or they will get a permission denied error You can get the UID from Nitix s password etc passwd file and these should match to the uid on the local unix sys tem To get around the uid problem you can enable the Mapping scheme for NFS to be ugidd on Nitix system and then install ugidd daemon on the remote unix system You can then access the files as long as the user id is the same Once the directory has been mounted you can synchronize the directory by issuing the fol lowing command on the remote unix station rsync zav username server username tmpdir This will use the rsync protocol to sync usernames home directory from a Nitix system called server to tmpdir on the local machine using the userid username Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 275 Using rsync Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 276 Chapter 32 Exchangelt Exchangelt Overview Integrate
19. TunnelVision Status The System Status screen always displays the status of active VPNs Please Note You may need to click your browser s Refresh button to see the latest information SERVICES STATUS SNAPSHOT E ire Tunnel Vision E niti2 IPsec Connections 192 168 0 0 24 Up 192 168 1 0 24 Up PPTP Connections E Not enabled The Idle Time out If either end of the tunnel does not receive any data for approximately 20 minutes it assumes that one end has disconnected from the Internet or that the tunnel is no longer needed If one end of the tunnel is still on line it will try to rebuild the connection automatically Since this only takes a few seconds and happens only when the tunnel has been idle for a long time this should not affect you However this behaviour can often cause the VPN Tunnels status light to turn yellow or red This is not a sign of malfunction Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 204 Chapter 20 IPsec IPsec An alternative to TunnelVision As an alternative to TunnelVision Nitix can create an IPsec tunnel to a remote server Tun nelVision s more advanced features such as automatic hostname and route sharing are not provided by IPsec We generally recommend using TunnelVision however for strict stan dards compliance or for connecting to a server that isn t another Nitix powered server IPsec may be your only option Known Configurations Nitix s IPsec functionality
20. button e Click on the Jmport button 6 To export a calendar to another source Click on the Import Export button The Import Export screen displays Inthe Export Calendar section of the screen select the format to export to Select the exporting time span Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 148 WebMail Click on the Export button Tasks 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Tasks button Any tasks that you have will display Task Details Name Financial report Categories Business Due By 06 04 04 Priority 1 High Completion Status 50 None specified Complete Task Modify Task Delete Task Back to Task List Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 149 WebMail 2 To adda new task click on the New Task button The following screen displays Adding A New Task Subject Sales Report Due date C None 1 E pune os Start date C None e MH My 2004 Status npoges H Priority High F Complete 20 1 Reminder None cf sbwe ms at 13 sl Categories gaes S Private No Description Run monthly sales report H Date completed None c a E une Hy eoa Total work 0 hours Actual work rors Mileage LO O Biling information LO Companies C None ern C Daily Recurs every day s C Weekly Recurs every week s on Mol Tul wel Th Fr sal sul Monthly Recurs every h month s on the same date Monthly Recurs the first day Blore
21. Enter appropriate search criteria and click on the Search button The results display in the Search Results section of the screen 5 To send a message to this person place a check in the checkbox beside their name and click on the Send Message button To clear the Search Results section of the screen click on the Clear Search button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 146 WebMail Importing and Exporting Addresses 1 To import addresses from another source Click on the Import Export button The Import Export screen displays Inthe mport Addressbook section of the screen select the format to export from your options are CSV Outlook CSV and vCard Select the destination should be My Addressbook e Select the file to import Either enter the file name directly into the empty field or select it by clicking in the Browse button Click on the Jmport button 2 To export addresses to another source Click on the Import Export button The Import Export screen displays Inthe Export Addressbook section of the screen select the format to export to Select the source to export from should be My Addressbook Click on the Export button Selecta location for the file and click on the OK button Calendar 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Calendar button The WebMail calendar dis plays Sanday Monday Tsy Wednesday Thansday Friday Ss Howe SH so so Ja 3 Ja a oO su 3m sm 3m EI 3m a sm a
22. Ethernet LED indicates Ethernet activity Hard Drive LED indicates hard drive activity Power LED lights up when power is on ao RR NM Power Button used to turn the box on and off Back View Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 14 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Please Note The image above corresponds to our Micro model Power socket where the PC power from the power supply is connected PS 2 keyboard connector used to connect a keyboard LAN 2 used to connect to a LAN segment or to the Internet Serial port used to connect an external modem Parallel port used to connect a printer VGA connector used to connect a monitor LAN 1 used to connect to the local area network LAN po SM ocv deo 9o i LAN 3 used to connect to a LAN segment or to the Internet Connecting the Power 1 Ensure that the Net Integrator has adequate ventilation Place the back of the unit at least one to two feet 12 24 away from the wall Make sure the front of the unit is easily accessible 2 Connect one end of the power cord into the power socket on the back of the Net Integrator Mark I and Mark II Micro 3 Connect the other end of the cord into a standard power outlet 4 Turn on the main power switch 5 Press the power button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 15 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Ethernet Connections What is Ethernet
23. Ifa facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the applica tion does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 350 on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this se
24. On the screen that displays select a character from the appropriate list and paste it into your message 8 Ifyou do not want a copy of this email saved in your Sent Items folder remove the check from the box Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 142 WebMail 9 Place a check in the Request a Return Receipt box if you want the recipient to notify you when they receive your message Please Note The recipient can choose not to send a return receipt to you 10 To attach a document to your message Click on the Browse button Select the file from the window that displays and click on the OK button The file displays in the Attachments field Click on the Attach button Please Note To remove an attachment place a check in the attachment s checkbox and click on Remove Selected 11 Enter the message content in the empty section of the screen 12 Click on the Save Draft button if you want to save this message in your Drafts folder Click on the Send button to send the message to the recipient s Please Note Clicking on the Cancel button prior to sending the email aborts the message Opening a Received Message 1 From your inbox click on a link in the From or Subject section of the screen The mes sage opens INBOX Contract 5 of 7 CAESA This message to F Delete Reply Reply to All Forward Redirect Blacklist Message Source Save as Print Back to INBOX ID Date Fri 28 May 2004 16 54 43 00
25. Otherwise it will be renamed to filename INFECTED and the user whose directory the file was found in will be informed via email of the virus Please Note This option is only available if you have purchased Net Integration Technologies VirusProtect anti virus software Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 88 File Services 3 If appropriate enable the Macintosh File Server If Macintosh file services are not enabled users will not have access to their personal network directories or shared team directories from Macintosh workstations 4 If appropriate enable the Windows File Server If Windows file services are not enabled users will not have access to their personal network directories or shared team directories from Windows workstations 5 Enable the Windows File Server if you are using a workgroup acting as a domain mem ber or if you are acting as a domain controller a Enter a workgroup name if you are not acting as a domain member or a domain con troller This name indicates the workgroup under which the Nitix powered server will be listed as a resource in Windows Network Neighbourhood Please Note lt is recommended that you enter the Windows workgroup name being used by other workstations in the office If you are setting up a new network you can use any workgroup name you wish just make sure that you configure your Windows workstations so they belong to the same workgroup b Enter a domain name if
26. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Dazuko nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBU TORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT WARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 327 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 328 Appendix K Eric Rosenquist License Copyright Eric Rosenquist Strata Software Limited http
27. could be very confusing Please Note You will need to set each Windows workstation s domain name to match this in order for Windows file and printer sharing to work properly 4 Enable the domain controller for Windows 5 Enter the administrative password for joining computers to the domain Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly 6 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 104 NT Domain Services Joining Windows Systems to a Domain All Windows workstations will have to be added to the domain once the domain con troller is enabled The predefined administrative username needed to add a system to the domain is always root For Windows 95 98 ME A Windows 95 98 ME workstation does not actually join the domain However it is able to log onto the domain with the following steps 1 In Windows select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The Control Panel window dis plays TIEZ Go From Hele ej 4 2 ajg pae 2 Up Copy Pa Control 5 3 t 4 Panel nd Modem Mon Mubreso pau Me Poem Sources 3b Management a Ss 23 Prts hegoa Sandi Synen Serra F ED 2 Select Network from the list The Network window displays Click on the Configuration tab neo ee aixi Cortigaohen ldeciicahion Access Corte The lolioveng network componendis ae nskalledi Kom Fant EtherLink XL 10 100 TX Dianat NIC ICI Di M ud Private
28. department could be connected to a central point Tunnel Vision can work in either a fully meshed topology or a non meshed topology Fully Meshed Topology In a mesh topology devices are connected with many redundant interconnections between network nodes In a true mesh topology every node has a connection to every other node in the network An advantage of such a network would be that no branch is reliant upon a sin gle connection Non Meshed Topology In a non meshed or hub and spoke topology all devices are connected to a central hub i e Headquarters which dictates the access rules of the VPN to the other branches Nodes communicate across the network by passing data through the hub A typical application Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 197 TunnelVision would be to implement a Terminal Services solution using the Headquarters as the gateway for the branch sites Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 198 TunnelVision How TunnelVision Works A VPN allows all of the computers on two networks to communicate with each other For this to happen you have to first configure their subnet addresses When you install Nitix the IP addresses used on your local network don t really matter Internet standards recommend that all IP addresses that are owned by internal business net works and not used on the Internet itself begin with 192 168 The third part of the IP address specifies which private s
29. tem Nitix SB Nitix SE and Nitix PE One additional free Nitix CAL is allocated for a Nitix administrator License Information To see how many Nitix CALs are licensed for the system and currently being used 1 Login to Nitix with your administrator username and password WebConfig s System Status page displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 63 Client Access Licenses 2 Select Software Update from the left hand side of the WebConfig screen The Software Update screen displays with a Notices box at the top of the screen showing how many Nitix CALs you have i NOTICES nangelt our plugin for Outloo or Outloo Please Note The User Authentication Method box on WebConfig s main System Status screen also dis plays how many Nitix CALs are licensed for the system and currently being used If you exceed your licensed number of Nitix CALs a Notices box similar to the following will appear at the top of each page in WebConfig NOTICES will not have Please Note To purchase additional Nitix licenses please contact your authorized Net Integration Tech nologies Reselling Partner Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 64 TE DoubleVision What is DoubleVision DoubleVision is a Nitix feature that allows you to configure two or more Internet connec tions For example you can combine a cable modem and an ADSL link two ADSL links multiple dial up modems to the same or different ISP or any
30. 230 entries manual creation of 230 entries types of 231 hierarchy 229 lookup and caching server 227 mail records 128 publishing server 227 working with SMTP server 128 Domain Controller 101 Domain Member 101 domain names 50 229 231 domain registrars DNS 229 DoubleVision 65 DSL connection 61 configuration of 61 dynamic IP addresses 242 dynamic web site 266 E Email Aliases 124 email services 119 advanced email settings 131 DNS mail records 128 IMAP server 122 LDAP server 123 132 mail virus scanner 120 POP3 server 122 realtime blackhole list 120 SMTP server 121 WebMail server 122 Ethernet 16 ethernet cables 16 port connections 16 Exchangelt 277 assign clients 279 email configuration 282 Outlook configuration 281 overview 277 plugin download 279 server configuration 278 using Exchangelt 293 F FastForward 239 common port numbers 246 configuration of 243 creating a new forward 243 editing a forward 244 firewall security 239 proxy servers 241 static and dynamic IP addresses 242 TCP 241 TCP IP 239 UDP 240 file sharing services 87 configuration of 88 Domain Controller 89 Domain Member 89 Macintosh file server 89 NFS file server 90 Windows file server 89 file transfer protocol FTP 50 port 21 246 firewall services 223 log 225 restrict outgoing traffic 223 FTP services 175 anonymous FTP server 177 enabling FTP access 177 G GNU General Public License 331 GNU Lesser General Public Licens
31. 270 Network File System 273 What is NFS 273 Installing and Configuring ugidd 273 Mounting an NFS directory 274 Unmounting an NFS Directory 274 Chapter 31 Chapter 32 Addendums rsync 275 What is rsync 275 Using rsyne 275 Exchangelt 277 Exchangelt Overview 277 Exchangelt Server Configuration 278 Outlook Configuration 281 Using Exchangelt 293 Licensing 297 Adrian Sun License 303 Apache Public License 305 Apple Public Source License 307 The Artistic License 315 Australian National University License 319 BSD License 321 Carnegie Mellon University License 323 Caldera Systems License 325 Dazuko License 327 Eric Rosenquist License 329 GNU General Public License 331 GNU Lesser General Public License 337 GNU Library General Public License 347 Gregory M Christy License 357 HighPoint License 359 Internet Software Consortium License 361 Linux PAM License 363 LILO License 365 mod auth pam License 367 mod ssl License 369 NVIDIA License 371 OpenLDAP Public License 375 OpenSSL License 377 OSSP Project License 379 The PHP License version 2 02 381 The PHP License version 3 0 383 Rick R Kaseguma License 385 RSA License 387 SSLeay License 389 Strace License 391 Sun Microsystems License 393 The Regents of the University of California License 395 University of Chicago License 397 University of Michigan License 399 University of Utah and the Regents of the University of California Lic
32. 67 time setting 50 51 transport control protocol TCP 241 TunnelVision 195 configuring a client 202 configuring a master server 201 creating a VPN 200 encryption 196 fully meshed 197 idle time out 204 network address translation 199 non meshed 197 private networks 195 status 204 steel pipe 199 subnet numbers 200 VPNs 195 U user accounts 67 creating 69 deleting 72 editing 71 service integration 67 user datagram protocol UDP 240 V views of Net Integrator front 12 virtual network computing VNC 236 configuration of 236 virtual private networks VPNs 195 virtual web servers 159 virus scanner mail 120 Ww web caching 167 web filtering 169 accepting access requests 171 adding permitted web sites 171 enabling 169 full Internet access 170 positive web filtering 169 web services 155 hosting multiple web sites 161 master web server 155 secure web services 162 SSL encryption 162 virtual web servers 159 web server 155 webmaster directory 156 WebConfig 25 configuring TCP IP 26 creating an administrator account 37 main status screen 40 WebMail 135 access to 137 address book 146 calendar 147 configuration of 141 email 142 server 119 webmaster directory 156 Windows file server 89 workstation viewer 235 virtual network computing 236 X X 509 Certificate 162 Z Zlib License 409
33. 89 2195 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2888 Microsoft Corp G gt cd pwdump2 C pwdump2 gt pwdump2 gt list txt_ 7 Open the file called list txt This contains a list of Windows users Highlight the users you wish to import right click with your mouse and choose Copy lox File Edit Format Help Administrator 500 1b51a943aafe6b69066b9e64566c2479 e43b5388f3ca75777cb dla45 d3b435b51404eeaad3b435b51404 fe0d16a8031b73c5 ac 8440 1f52188 Select All Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 73 User amp Team Management 8 In WebConfig click on User Setup in the left side menu The main setup screen displays TEAM SETUP USER SETUP User D Disk Space Used Actic ADD NEW USER ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY 9 Click on mport Users The Import Users screen will display IMPORT USERS Import Users Info SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 74 User amp Team Management 10 Right click on your mouse in the field called Import Users Info Choose Paste This will copy the contents of the file called list txt into this space IMPORT USERS 0oh0 1001 36f3eaf921e21a49fcageese83230f24a 6e26782b f55dce47548440002f055e41 Import Users Info O Create Users Delete Users aL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T 11 Click on Save Changes This screen will display NOT
34. Add New Hardware Qi Regional Settings sa F Add Remove Programs xj Sounds Control Fe Date Time a System un Display E Telephony Panel Fonts e Users E Game Controllers 9 Internet Options Network Keyboard Configures network E3Neyboar hardware and Modems software E Mouse 8 Multimedia Microsoft Home Technical Support P ODBC Data Sources 32bit A Passwords u Power Management Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 26 Connecting to WebConfig 2 Select Network from the list The Network window displays Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter Y NDISWAN gt Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter HEITIBVE Kiaperties Microsoft Family Logon Click on the Add button if TCP IP does not display in the installed components list 3 The Select Network Component window displays Select Protocol from the window Click Add Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 27 Connecting to WebConfig 4 The Select Network Protocol window displays Select Network Protocol Fast Infrared Protocol IPX SPX compatible Protocol Select Microsoft in the Manufacturers section of the window Select TCP IP in the Net work Protocols section of the window Click on the OK button TCP IP should now dis play on the Network window Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter 3 NDISWAN gt Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter TCP IP gt Dial e Microsoft Family Logon Nitix User Manu
35. Directory or Address Book Type You can choose the type of directory or address book you d like to add Internet Directory Service LDAP Connect to an LDAP server to find and verify e mail addresses and other information O Additional Address Books Connect to an address book to find and verify e mail addresses and other information lt Back Next gt Cancel 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter the Server name E mail Accounts Directory Service LDAP Settings You can enter the required settings to access information in a directory service Server Information Type the name of the directory server your Internet service provider or system administrator has given you Server Name server domain com Logon Information This server requires me to log on x Back Next gt Cancel 8 Click the Next button 9 The Add Email Account screen appears asking if it is okay to exit Outlook Click the OK button 10 Click the Finish button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 290 Exchangelt Installing Client Plugin Please Note You must be logged in as the Administrator to install the Exchangelt plugin Installing the plugin using a user account may not install the plugin properly Please Note You must configure Outlook before installing the Exchangelt plugin 1 2 3 Go to where you placed the Exchangelt plugin Double click the Exchangelt plugin The Exchangelt
36. Disk Quotas 12 Select the teams this user will be a part of Team membership gives users full access to the team s shared directory 13 Click on the Save Changes button The Main User Setup page re displays and the user displays in the list of previously created users Editing Users 1 On the Main User Setup screen click on the appropriate user s Edit Action button The Modify User screen displays MODIFY USER vcn 7 Access f Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Test E Mail CONVERT TO TEAM E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Change the user s information as appropriate Refer to Creating Users 1n this chapter for a description of the fields on this screen 3 Click on Convert to Team to convert this user into a team Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 71 User amp Team Management 4 Click on the Saves Changes button Deleting Users IMPORTANT Deleting a user means that all of the user s personal files email settings mailbox and any undelivered email in the mailbox will be deleted Once this is done none of the above can be recovered unless you restore the data from a previous backup 1 On the Main User Setup screen click on the appropriate user s Delete button 2 A delete user confirmation box appears Select the OK button to continue and DELETE the user Import Users from Windows To upload user information from a Windows 2000 or NT se
37. For example if the unit s internal IP address is 192 168 10 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 you would enter 192 168 10 0 24 Please Note To tunnel only to the remote server and not to a subnet behind it leave the IPsec Remote Server field blank or enter the remote server s IP address from the first field 7 Enter your Remote IKE key key 8 From the Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK field select PSK Please Note The RSA key feature is still under development therefore we recommend that you only use Preshared Secret Keys PSK 9 Enable the Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS feature Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 206 IPsec Please Note It must be set the same way on both ends of the connection The IPsec protocols do not provide a method for the two ends to negotiate this so you must ensure to set it correctly 10 Click on the Save Changes button Adding an Anonymous Incoming Connection IPsec route 1 Select Psec Setup from the VPN Setup screen The Psec Setup screen displays IPSEC ROUTES Remote Server Remote Subnet Enabled Action Nc IPsec connections vet ADD NEW ROUTE e HOME 2 Select Add New Route The Create IPsec Route screen displays CREATE IPSEC ROUTE Remote IKE key Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 Enter 0 0 0 0 in the Remote Server IP address field Please
38. Fulltext Br VARCHAR not rat v MIO oo 60 John VARCHAR V not null v o o o ecu VARCHAR wj not null Eje Jo fe jols No tables found m database Table comments Table type z Detauh Seve Il eld type is enum or set please enter the values using thes format a b e Ifyou ever need to put a backslash V or a single quote amongst those values backslache it for example xyz oc a b For default values please enter just a single value without backslash escaping or quotes using this format a Documentation 8 Enter basic field information Field Type Length Values Documentation Name VARCHAR wll20 E mail VARCHAR 20 Phone VARCHAR whi Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 259 MySQL Server Please Note VARCHAR in the Type column simply means that the entry contains numerous char acters In the Length Values column specify the maximum number of characters allowed in the entry 9 If appropriate select one field as Primary by clicking on the check box This prevents duplication in the address book i e prevents two entries from having the same name email address or phone number Please Note All other options such as Attributes Null and Default are advanced features that you are not required to fill in 10 Click on the Save button The following screen displays e Database John Table AddressBook running on localhost Home
39. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARIS ING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based on public domain software written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois Urbana Champaign For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server project please see lt http www apache org gt Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 306 Appendix D Apple Public Source License Version 2 0 August 6 2003 Please read this License carefully before downloading this software By downloading or using this software you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this License If you do not or cannot agree to the terms of this License please do not download or use the software 1 General Definitions This License applies to any program or other work which Apple Computer Inc Apple makes publicly available and which contains a notice placed by Apple identifying such program or work as Original Code and stating that it is subject to the terms of this Apple Public Source License version 2 0 License As used in this License 1 1 Applicable Patent Rights mean a in the case where Apple is the grantor of rights i cl
40. LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI RECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTH ERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 370 Appendix V NVIDIA License IMPORTANT NOTICE READ CAREFULLY This License For Customer Use of NVIDIA Software LICENSE is the agreement which governs use of the software of NVIDIA Corporation and its subsidiaries NVIDIA downloadable herefrom including computer software and associated printed materials SOFTWARE By downloading installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this LICENSE If you do not agree to the terms of this LICENSE do not download the SOFTWARE RECITALS Use of NVIDIA s products requires three elements the SOFTWARE the hardware on a graphics controller board and a personal computer The SOFTWARE is protected by copy right laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is not sold and instead is only licensed for use strictly in accor dance with this document The hardware is protected by va
41. MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 6 2 No Liability for Consequential Damages TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL NVIDIA OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIA DAM AGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NVIDIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 7 MISCELLANEOUS The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifi cally disclaimed If any provision of this LICENSE is inconsistent with or cannot be fully enforced under the law such provision will be construed as limited to the extent necessary to be consistent with and fully enforceable under the law This agreement is the final complete and exclusive agreement between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof and super sedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings and agreements relating to such subject matter whether oral or written Customer agrees that it will not ship transfer or export the SOFTWARE into any country or use the SOFTWARE in any manner prohibited by the United States Bureau of Export Administration or any export laws restrictions or regula tions This LICENSE may only be modified in writing signed by an authoriz
42. Macintosh and UNIX style clients Files created by Windows users can transparently be seen by Macin tosh users and vice versa The management and administration of file services is tightly integrated with user manage ment and administration Please refer to Service Integration in Chapter 7 User amp Team Management for a detailed explanation of how file sharing services are automatically setup during user and team creation Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 87 File Services Configuring File Services 1 Select the File from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays FILE SERVER SETUP Enable File Virus Scanner Enable Macintosh file server Enable Windows file serve Windows workgroup domain WORKGROUP Actas Domain Member Yes ONo T Domain Member Admin username Administrator Domain Member Admin password m Domain Member Re enter admin password m Actas Domain Controller Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles W yes QONo Domain Controller Admin password username is root Domain Controller Re enter admin password my PERMISSIONS SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Ifappropriate enable the file virus scanner With this option selected all files on the sys tem will be automatically scanned for viruses every 12 hours When a virus is encoun tered it will be cleaned up if possible
43. Modify Email Alias screen displays MODIFY EMAIL ALIAS Eee amanyperson abc com SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T T 3 Change the alias information as appropriate 4 Click on the Saves Changes button To delete an Email Alias 1 On the Email Aliases screen click on the appropriate alias Edit Action button The sys tem will prompt you with Are you sure you want to delete aliasname Click OK EMAIL ALIASES Alias N Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to delete aliasname ADD ALIAS HOME 2 The Email Aliases Notices screen displays notifying you that it is Deleting alias alias name Click on the Add Alias button to add another alias click on the appropriate alias Edit Action button to delete another alias or click on the Home button to return to the Email Aliases screen 3 Click on the Saves Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 127 Email Services Configuring DNS Records Although email services are fully functional after the administrator enables the appropriate mail servers the mail delivery DNS records have to be configured before users can send mail to and receive mail from outside users How do DNS Mail Records work When you send an email to johndoe example com the message is downloaded to your SMTP server which needs to know the IP address of example com in order to deliver the message The SMTP server
44. Next Internet Connection Wizard Internet Directory Server Name Internet Connection Wizard Click the Next button Click the Finish button Click the Close button Close Outlook eo NN Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 264 Exchangelt Configuring Microsoft Outlook 2002 Configuring Email If you are already using Outlook 2002 select Tools gt Accounts then click on Add gt Mail The Internet Connection Wizard screen appears Jump to Step five 5 If this is your first time using Outlook 2002 start at step one 1 1 PE oS oe IN 8 Open Microsoft Outlook 2002 The Outlook 2002 Startup screen appears Click the Next button The Account Configuration screen appears Click the Yes button Click the Next button The Email Accounts screen appears asking you to select your email server type Select IMAP Li Ax Server Type You can choose the type of server your new e mail acount will work with E C Microsoft Exchange Server Connect to an Exchange server to read e mail access public folders and share documents C POP3 Connect to a POP3 e mail server to download your e mail IMAP Connect to an IMAP e mail server to download e mail and synchronize mailbox Folders C HTTP Connect to an HTTP e mail server such as Hotmail to download e mail and synchronize mailbox Folders C Additional Server Types Connect to another workgroup or 3rd party mail server lt Back Canc
45. None E None RESET PERMISSIONS Please Note You can remove a user s permissions by clicking the X button in the action column This option does not appear for the file owner or for the Everyone Else row Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 95 File Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 96 Chapter 9 Disk Quotas Disk Quota defines the maximum amount of hard disk space allowed for a user s files Nitix s Disk Quota feature allows administrators to set specific disk quotas for individual users For example a user s Disk Quota value can be set to predetermined values small medium large to a specified value for that user or you can choose not to have the user s disk usage subject to a quota Please Note Disk quotas pertain to a user s files and email data Setting Default Disk Quota Values To set default disk quota values Small Medium and Large that can be used when assigning disks quotas to users 1 Select Quota Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main Quota Options Setup screen displays QUOTA OPTIONS SETUP Default Small Quota Value Default Medium Quota Value Default Large Quota Value SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T T TEAMS OVER QUOTA Team ID Disk Space Used USERS OVER QUOTA User ID Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 97 Setting Individual User Disk Quotas 2 Enter a Default Small Quota Valu
46. Note The Nitix powered server must have a static IP address 4 Enter the internal IP address of the remote unit as well as the subnet in the Remote subnet field For example if the unit s internal IP address is 192 168 10 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 you would enter 192 168 10 0 24 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 207 IPsec Please Note To tunnel only to the remote server and not to a subnet behind it leave the IPsec Remote Server field blank or enter the remote server s IP address from the first field 5 Enter your Remote IKE key key 6 From the Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK field select PSK Please Note Please Note The RSA key feature is still under development therefore we recom mend that you only use Preshared Secret Keys PSK 7 Enable the Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS feature Please Note It must be set the same way on both ends of the connection The IPsec protocols do not provide a method for the two ends to negotiate this so you must ensure to set it correctly 8 Click on the Save Changes button Editing an IPsec route 1 Select the appropriate IPsec route s Edit Action button on the Psec Setup screen IPSEC ROUTES 1 92 16 4 i Down 192 16 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 208 IPsec The Modify IPsec Route screen displays MODIFY IPSEC ROUTE 117511 081341384163 80 3 12 EO 192 168 21 0724 0 24 Local subnet 192
47. OF LIABILITY Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 391 WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT WARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 392 Appendix AF Sun Microsystems License Copyright by Sun Microsystems Computer Co Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 393 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 394 Appendix AG The Regents of the University of California License Copyright The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the
48. Plugin for Microsoft Outlook Setup License Agreement window dis plays Click the Agree button to accept license The Exchangelt Plugin for Microsoft Outlook Setup Installation Folder window dis plays Click the Install button to install the Exchangelt plugin in the default destination or select a different folder by using the Browse button then click on the nstall button Once installation is complete click the Close button Configure Outlook to use Exchangelt 1 2 3 4 Open Outlook The Exchangelt Login window displays Exchangelt login Please choose a message store to synchronize with the Exchangelt server and enter login information Enter store and login information and click OK to login or click Cancel to disable Exchangelt for the duration of this Outlook session Message store Personal Folders m Server server domain com User name Username xokolololokekeier Password Select the Message Store you wish to have synchronized The default store is Personal Folders Enter the name of your Nitix powered server The default name is calendar Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 291 Exchangelt 5 Enter your User name and Password 6 Click the OK button To Enable Synchronization 1 From the Outlook Tools menu select Options 2 Click on the Exchangelt tab 3 Ensure that Automatically synchronize with server every is checked Options Prefere
49. SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM OR CONTRIBU TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEM PLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THE ORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software has been written for the Internet Software Consortium by Ted Lemon lt mel lon fugue com gt in cooperation with Vixie Enterprises To learn more about the Internet Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 361 Software Consortium see http www vix com isc To learn more about Vixie Enter prises see http www vix com Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 362 XUNG Linux PAM License Unless otherwise explicitly stated the following text describes the licensed conditions under which the contents of this Linux PAM release may be distributed Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux PAM with or without modifica tion are permitted provided that the following
50. THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 408 Appendix AN Zlib License Copyright 1995 2002 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly jloup gzip org Mark Adler madler alumni caltech edu The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFCs Request for Comments 1950 to 1952 in the files ftp ds internic net rfc rfc1950 txt zlib format rfc1951 txt deflate for mat and rfc1952 txt gzip format Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 409 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 410 Glossary ADSL Bandwidth Bit Cable Modem Cache Certificate Authority Client
51. The administrator can include any subsection of the domain If www red blue org is requested the admin can add www red blue org red blue org or blue org Any sites ending with that domain are permitted for example ifthe administrator added red blue org then green red blue org would be allowed but violet blue org would not be allowed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 173 Web Filtering Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 174 Ghavient FTP Services FTP Server Nitix uses a File Transfer Protocol FTP server that allows users and teams to access net work and web files FTP services are automatically enabled for users on the internal network Anonymous FTP Server The FTP server can be used in anonymous mode to allow uploads and downloads of files to a specific directory without authentication from the remote user This anonymous mode of operation is commonly used for public file distribution on the Internet For example if your company wants to offer a brochure in electronic format visitors to your web site should be advised to click on the FTP link to download the file from your FTP server Although the file can be downloaded from your web server FTP is the preferred method because it offers superior performance for high volume and large file transfers When Anonymous FTP is enabled Nitix automatically creates a team called FTP Members of this team have access to the FTP directory All files pl
52. User Manual Version 4 0 250 Disk Management Converting a RAID disk to idb If your RAID array is working correctly you can convert a RAID disk to idb IMPORTANT Converting your last RAID disk to idb eliminates disk redundancy regardless of how many disks your Nitix powered server has 1 The Disk Status section of the System Status screen has a link telling you that you can configure your last disk as idb Click on this link 2 The following displays in the Disk Status section of the screen d or remov y disks until this pr Disk Status 3 Click on the Reboot link The following screen displays Rebooting Your Net Integrator is rebooting Please wait a few minutes then click below to return to the main screen Return 4 When an IP address appears on your Nitix powered server s display panel console click on the Return button The System Status screen displays The Disk Status section of the screen displays your new disk configuration s in standalone mode If your Disk Status Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 251 Disk Management Disk Status Messages Depending on your disk configuration one or more of the following messages will display in the Disk Status section of WebConfig s System Status screen 1 The RAID array is rebuilding Please do not add or remove any disks until this process is finished complete A RAID array needs to build itself the first tim
53. User Manual Version 4 0 320 PUES BSD License CopyrightO 1989 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written per mission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIA BILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN AN
54. WITH OUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE QUIET ENJOYMENT OR NON INFRINGEMENT Please see the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 314 Appendix E The Artistic License Preamble The intent ofthis document is to state the conditions under which a Package may be copied such that the Copyright Holder maintains some semblance of artistic control over the devel opment of the package while giving the users of the package the right to use and distribute the Package in a more or less customary fashion plus the right to make reasonable modifica tions Definitions Package refers to the collection of files distributed by the Copyright Holder and deriva tives of that collection of files created through textual modification Standard Version refers to such a Package if it has not been modified or has been modified in accordance with the wishes of the Copyright Holder as specified below Copyright Holder is whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the package You is you if you re thinking about copying or distributingthis Package Reasonable copying fee is whatever you can justify on the basis of media cost duplication charges time of people involved and so on You will not be required to justify it to the Copyright Holder but only to the computing community at lar
55. WWW Server Tee Gwe Res oe webmaster is Trusted hosis only Yes ONo Enable users personal home pages SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 4 Enter your internet domain name e g example com as the virtual domain s host name This host name is used as a DNS entry for domain name resolution 5 The name of your Nitix powered server automatically populates the P Address of Virtual WWW Server field If you want to use a different IP address enter it in this field Please Note Your ISP has to provide you with an extra IP address if you are configuring a virtual web server on an outside untrusted interface 6 Select a team to perform Webmaster duties from the drop down list 7 Choose whether or not to make the Virtual WWW site accessible only by trusted hosts i e the local network This way you can easily host both an intranet and a public web site from the same server 8 Indicate whether or not you want to serve personal home pages from the WWW subdirec tory located in each user s personal network directory 9 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 160 Web Services Deleting a Virtual Web Server 1 Click on the Virtual Domains button on the WWW Setup screen The Virtual Domains screen displays showing all existing virtual domains Click on the appropriate server s Delete Action button Click OK to confirm the deletion in the window that displays P
56. Welcome to Mail Username Password 5 Enter the username and password that you use to login to Nitix Click on the Login but ton The WebMail screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 138 WebMail Using the WebMail Screen 2MITIX AUTONOMIC LINUX L2 s ER re m ra A 5 INBOX Compose Folders Options Search Address Book Calendar Tasks Notes Home Logout Open Folder INBOX i to 1 of 1 Messages 2 Select Mark as 9 Move Copy Messages to Delete Undelete Blacklist Hide Deleted Purge Deleted 3 v 4 A pate A From 7 4 subject Thread 4 size D 1 14 18 15 anyuser2 weavernet null Sales Report 6 15kb New Seen Answered Important t Deleted CI brat Personal Delete Undelete Blacklist 5 Hide Deleted Purge Deleted 4 Select Merk as 10 move copy Messages to 1 From the Main Webmail Menu click on the Inbox button to view the contents of your inbox Compose button to compose a new email message See Composing an Email Message for more information Folders button to view a screen that lists your folders On this screen you can cre ate edit and delete folders Options button to view a screen that lists various configuration options See Con figuring WebMail for more information Search button to search for a specific message Refer to Search Function for more information e Addressbook to view your address book On
57. Windows domain if Nitix is in Domain Member mode It will also display the number of Nitix Client Access Licenses CALs available for use Displays the status of the WebMail server and the address for webmail access Displays whether or not there is a valid virus scanner license and the last reported update It also displays when the definitions were last updated how many viruses you are protected against and links to a report on how many viruses were detected since the last reboot Displays the status of the DNS servers Displays the status of the port forwarding engine and the number of forwarded ses sions The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is opera tional yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service Displays the status of web publishing services The number of sessions displayed rep resents the number of active web sessions currently open The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if ser vice is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service Displays the status of the secure web server The number of sessions displayed repre sents the number of active secure web sessions currently open The
58. Windows workgroup domain Actas Domain Member Domain Member Admin username Domain Member Admin password Domain Member Re enter admin password Actas Domain Controller WORKGROUP L QNo Administrator Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles Enable NFS file server Q No Mapping scheme for NFS PERMISSIONS SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 91 File Services 2 Click on the Permissions button at the bottom of the screen The Select Files screen dis plays SELECT FILES Teams E autoinstall exchangeit admin log test_test webmaster 3 Scroll down the list of Teams Admins and Users in the selection box and click on the directory of the user you wish to assign permissions to Click on the check mark icon to the right of the list SELECT FILES anyuser2 anyuser3 4 The Modify File Permissions screen displays showing the current permissions for that directory Folders in anyuser Users Teams AAN v MODIFY FILE PERMISSIONS ReadOnly OQ Re Aie None ReadOnly Re Aie Q None oR e V None RESET PERMISSIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 92 File Services 5 Modify the user s permissions by clicking on the radio buttons Read Only Read Write and None Click on the check mark button in the Action column to save the permissions that have been s
59. act as clients Please Note A static IP address is guaranteed never to change so people on the Internet can always find you To obtain a static IP address talk to your ISP DDNS can be used in place of a static IP address Refer to Dynamic DNS in Chapter 23 Domain Name Services for more information Configuring a TunnelVision Master Server Ensure that the Nitix powered server you are configuring as the master server has a static IP address 1 Select VPN from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The VPN Setup screen displays VPN SETUP Enable PPTP Server To cf Enable Tunnel Vision Tunnel Vision Use Fully Meshed Mode Tunnel Vision Address of Master Server Tunnel Vision Password Re enter Tunnel Vision Password 2 Leave the default Enable PPTP Server setting Yes 3 Select Yes in the Enable Tunnel Vision section of the screen 4 Inthe Tunnel Vision Use Fully Meshed Mode box select Yes to run Tunnel Vision in a Fully Meshed mode and No to run it in a Non Meshed mode Please Note If you enable TunnelVision to work in fully meshed mode then your server can learn about other servers on the VPN by exchanging information through the Master Server Then each server will make connections directly to each of the other VPN connected servers directly as needed without needing to go through the master If you disable fully meshed mode then your server will only communicate dir
60. affect access to netwrud resources Computer name tesfvarop Full computer name tetany Mernber of Doman MAINOFFICE O Wakgous Cox eme 5 In the Member of section of the window select Domain Enter the name of the domain as entered in the Windows workgroup name field on the File Server Setup WebConfig Screen 6 Click on the OK button The next time you log on the login window will have an addi tional Domain field Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 110 NT Domain Services File Mounting Drive Mapping For Users Once the domain controller is enabled a user s files can be mounted directly onto any domain workstation upon login The shared files of any team that the user belongs to can also be mounted 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen Click on the Edit Action button for the appropriate user The Modify User screen displays MODIFY USER Password Re enter Password Administrator Access Allow FTP Access Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access a CONVERT TO TEAM e E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES From the drop down menu in the Automatically mount files as field select the drive that the user s files should be mounted as on the workstation The default drive is X Please Note Be sure to choose a drive that will not conflict with drives already in use 3 Click on the Save Changes button This can also be don
61. and binary forms with or without modification is permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name PHP must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this soft ware without prior written permission For written permission please contact group php net 4 Products derived from this software may not be called PHP nor may PHP appear in their name without prior written permission from group php net You may indicate that your software works in conjunction with PHP by saying Foo for PHP instead of calling it PHP Foo or phpfoo 5 The PHP Group may publish revised and or new versions of the license from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once covered code has been published under a particular version of the license you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such covered code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published by the PHP Group No one other than the PHP Group has the right to modify the terms appli cable to covered code create
62. automatically be added to the domain admins team Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 113 NT Domain Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 114 Grantors Print Services Nitix Print Services A Nitix powered server s parallel printer port can be connected to any type of printer that users are sharing on the internal network Nitix does not support the bidirectional mode of parallel devices it can send output to printers but cannot read detailed status information This means that any special print manager and status monitor software on your PC should be disabled Nitix s print services are setup automatically during the first system boot provid ing all Nitix users with unrestricted access to the shared printer The administrator installer is required to provide the appropriate drivers for the specified printer at the workstation Please Note Nitix supports parallel port printers and a range of local USB based printers Print Services does not support green enabled printers that shut themselves off when there is inactivity on the port Configuring Print Services Before you can print on a printer connected to your Nitix powered server you have to con figure Nitix for printing Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 115 Print Services 1 Click on the Printers button on the WebConfig screen Nitix will list all the available printers PRINT SETUP PRINTERS Queue Name Description PRI
63. community name Enable NIS Server Restrict outgoing connections System Time from Internet Fr Adjust Time Zone Enable NTP Server Y ADVANCED SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Inthe Act as public DNS server field select Yes 3 Click on the Save Changes button Configuring Email Clients Although there are a number of different email clients available today the configuration of most email clients is very similar The exact configuration of your email client depends on how you want your mail delivery to be configured The two most common configurations are listed below Configure your mail client according to the configuration that resembles your email setup 1 If your mail is hosted on your ISP s mail server Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 129 Email Services All users in your office have their own mail address and mailbox hosted on the ISP s server Your ISP supplies you with the name of the POP3 or IMAP server where your mail has to be retrieved and with the address for the SMTP mail delivery server Enter this address into the appropriate field during the configuration of your mail client Using your Nitix powered server as an SMTP server even if your mail is hosted by an ISP has its advantages especially if you often send large messages or if you have a slow Internet connection Your email client may be tied up for minutes or even hours if you attempt to send a large ema
64. demonstration purposes we will use the following address 192 168 0 1 b Enter http 192 168 0 1 8043 into a web browser s address bar Press Enter on your keyboard WebConfig s System Status page displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 253 Disk Management 6 The Disk Status section of the screen presents you with two options vay is in degraded mode If your os o your files Disk Status To configure the new disk as part of the existing RAID array click on add disk _ to your RAID array To configure the new disk as idb click on configure disk _ for use in idb backups 7 Depending on your choice Nitix will configure the new disk as idb or as part of your RAID array Disk Recovery SystemER SystemER Emergency Recovery a unique Nitix feature that is not available from any other manufacturer is an advanced set of features and procedures that allows rapid data recovery in case of complete hard disk failure enables Nitix to run in emergency mode after a hard disk failure Nitix is designed in such a way that the operating system along with simple backup and restore procedures allows for quick recovery in case of system failure Hard Disk Failure If your problem is a hard disk failure you will need the following in order to restore your Nitix powered server Last Backup from which you can recover data from your last backup Please Note All changes to system configuration user f
65. encrypts what it sends using both certificates thereby ensuring that only the intended recipient can de crypt it that the other side can be sure of the data s origin and that the message has not been tampered with A portion of a network which may be a physically independent network segment that shares a network address with other portions of a network A subnet is distinguished by its own subnet number Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A popular suite of protocols that allow computers to communicate on the Internet An application that lets you access resources on a Unix or Linux computer In order to use Telnet you need to be familiar with Unix based programs User Datagram Protocol A protocol used throughout the Internet for services such as DNS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 418 URL Uniform Resource Locator The standard method to give an address of any resource on the Internet A URL looks like this http www net itech com VPN Virtual Private Network VPNs allow communication between users in different offices To prevent people on the Internet from intercepting transmissions all information that passes through a VPN is protected with 128 bit encryption the strongest encryption technology available WAN Wide Area Network A network that connects different LANs using routers Web Browser An interface that lets you view material on the Internet The most popular web browsers are from Mic
66. external IP address To find the external IP address select Local from the Network Setup menu On the screen that displays click on the Advanced button In the Network Devices section of the screen that displays look at the IP address of the eth interface If the address is 204 1 30 12 enter http 204 1 30 12 email 3 What happens next depends on how your web security certificate was generated If your security certificate was generated by Nitix and not assigned to you by a certificate authority the following security alert may display when you login to WebMail x EN Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or T T changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid o The security certificate matches the name of the page you are trying to view Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate Please Note This alerts the user that the security certificate presented by Nitix cannot be verified for authenticity If you want a certificate that is authenticated by a certificate authority you will have to purchase one Please refer to Chapter 14 Web Services for more information 4 Click on the Yes button to continue The following screen displays w Net Integrator
67. flags Select the appropriate Message folders moe Click on the Search button to begin the search Please Note Click on the Reset button prior to clicking on the Search button to clear your search criteria 6 The Search Results screen displays showing all of the messages that match your search criteria If no messages display you can perform another search using different criteria Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 145 WebMail Address Book Adding an Entry 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on Addressbook The following screen displays i Calendar Tasks Notes Home LogO Contents of Exchangelt C ElLast Name First Name Email MD anyuser2weavemet null Edit anyuser2 weavernet null D Person Any anyperson domain com O User Any anyuser weavernet null 2 Click on the Add button The Add New Contact screen displays 3 Enter all appropriate information and click on the Save button Performing a Directory Search 1 Click on the Search button The Directory Search screen displays 2 Select Name or Email from the Find drop down list 3 Enter the search criteria and click on the Search button The results display in the Search Results section of the screen Please Note Clicking on the Search button without search criteria returns all of the addresses in your address book 4 To perform an advanced search Click on the Advanced Search button The Advanced Directory Search screen dis plays
68. get your e mail account working User Information Server Information Your Name Namel Incoming mail server IMAP server domain com E mail Address yser domain com Outgoing mail server SMTP seryver domain com Logon Information User Name Username Password v Remember password Log on using Secure Password More Settings Authentication SPA lt Back next gt cancel Please Note Ensure that the Log on Secure Password Authentication SPA is not checked Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 288 Exchangelt 10 Click the Next button 11 Click the Finish button 12 The User Name screen appears Enter your Name and Initials Click the OK button Please Note The User Name screen only appears if it your first time using Outlook Directory Services Setup 1 From Outlook select Tools gt Email Accounts 2 The Email Accounts screen appears E mail Accounts This wizard will allow you to change the e mail accounts and directories that Outlook uses E mail Add a new e mail account O View or change existing e mail accounts Directory Add a new directory or address book O View or change existing directories or address books 3 Under Directory choose Add a new directory or address book 4 Click the Next button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 289 Exchangelt 5 Select Internet Directory Service LDAP Email Accounts
69. idb backup unit var les Although the idb system automatically performs backup procedures without input from a system administrator you can turn off idb and manually initiate backup procedures Refer to Initiating an idb Backup in this chapter for more information Features of idb Instead of conventional backup tapes idb utilizes a removable high capacity hard disk which provides the following advantages Value one hard disk costs less than the five backup tapes needed to maintain a tape backup system High Capacity the idb backup cartridge can in most cases store a month or more of backup history Speed idb backup matches and often supersedes the backup speeds achieved by the most expensive tape systems on the market Instant Access regular backup tapes like cassette tapes are a linear medium meaning that you have to fast forward or rewind in order to find information idb technology like a compact disc provides almost instant access to data Backup Intelligence you do not need a network administrator to figure out which tapes need to be loaded and when NetIntelligence determines when a backup needs to be made and whether the backup should be full or incremental This decision is based on the amount of data on the main hard disk the amount of Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 179 Backup amp Restore utilized space on the idb system the compressibility of your data and the rate at
70. in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Caldera Systems nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written per mission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBU TORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CALDERA SYSTEMS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT WARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 325 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 326 Fra Dazuko License Copyright H BEDV Datentechnik GmbH All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1
71. incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For soft ware which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WAR RANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIA BLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDEN TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 355 TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCUR
72. installed Proceed to Establishing a Dial in Connection Ifit does not have a check you have to install the dial in software Proceed to step 5 5 Place a check in the Dial Up Networking box and click on the OK button 6 The Windows Setup screen re displays Click on the Apply button The software is installed automatically Reboot your computer when the software is finished installing Please Note You may be asked to insert your Windows 95 98 Me disk for additional software com ponents to be loaded Simply follow the instructions given to you Establishing a Dial in Connection When a user dials into a Nitix powered server the username will appear in the nternet Sta tus field of the System Status screen for the duration of the connection The administrator can terminate the connection from this screen In order to establish a dial in connection to your network you need to know your Nitix user name and password and the phone number of a modem that is connected to an external phone line Depending on your Internet connection it may take longer than normal to complete net work requests Follow these steps to establish a dial in connection on Windows 95 98 Me systems 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Dial up Net working Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 218 Remote Access Services 2 Double click on the Make New Connection icon The following screen displays Mak
73. intellectual property rights other than patent owned or controlled by You to use reproduce display perform modify sublicense distrib ute and Externally Deploy Your Modifications of the same scope and extent as Apple s licenses under Sections 2 1 and 2 2 above 4 Larger Works You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product In each such instance You must make sure the requirements of this License are ful filled for the Covered Code or any portion thereof 5 Limitations on Patent License Except as expressly stated in Section 2 no other patent rights express or implied are granted by Apple herein Modifications and or Larger Works may require additional patent licenses from Apple which Apple may grant in its sole discre tion 6 Additional Terms You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations and or other rights consistent with the scope of the license granted herein Additional Terms to one or more recipients of Covered Code However You may do so only on Your own behalf and as Your sole responsibility and not on behalf of Apple or any Contributor You must obtain the recipient s agreement that any such Addi tional Terms are offered by You alone and You hereby agree to indemnify defend and hold Apple and every Contributor harmless for any liability incurre
74. interfaces Netmask lists the IP network mask assigned to a particular interface Mode describes how an IP address was assigned to an interface Forced means that a permanent IP address was assigned by an administrator Eth should always have a forced IP address DHCP means that a temporary IP address was assigned by the DHCP server DHCP addresses change each time you turn on your Nitix powered server e NetMap indicates that the IP address was automatically assigned by Nitix Trust a very important parameter Yes signifies a trusting relationship with all hosts attached to that interface meaning that no firewall protection is applied to that inter face Eth0 should always be configured as trusted No means that any traffic arriving at that interface is considered non trusted as such appropriate firewall protection is applied All Internet connections should be configured as non trusted Action Button Clicking this button displays a screen where interface settings can be changed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 52 Configuring Nitix Reconfiguring Network Devices 1 Click on an interface s Action button 2 The Network Settings screen for that interface displays Network Settings for eth ET dE192 168 212 1 cs ere 55 255 255 0 Trust computers on this network pass them Os T through thefirewall i 3 Choose address automatically 8 No DHCP Client ID leave blank to use hos
75. it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d Ifa facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to e
76. leave blank to continue in trial mode _ SAVE CHANGES _ CANCEL CHANGES Updating your Acitvation Key To replace an existing Activation Key with a new one first go to the WebConfig In Web Config click on Software Update on the left and you will see your current Key displayed Click on the Edit button located to the right The Nitix Registration box will appear NITIX REGISTRATION ntly NIT 22A9 38Q1 5D74 3567 Enter your new Activation Key in the Nitix Registration box and then click on the Save Changes button to complete the process Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 39 Connecting to WebConfig NITIX REGISTRATION Activation Key leave blank to continue in trial mode Nr d 22A4 3001 95074 3367 SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES System Status Screen WebConfig s System Status screen displays the status of the services running on Nitix The WebConfig menu on the left side of the screen allows you to access and configure various Nitix subsystems Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 40 Connecting to WebConfig Logout o SYSTEM STATUS USER SETUP _ QUOTASETUP SOFTWARE UPDATE HARDWARE STATUS LOGS REPORTS TAKE SNAPSHOT SERVER SETUP Disk Space Used FILE E MAIL WWW FTP DNS BACKUP NETWORK SETUP LOCAL WORKSTATIONS PRINTERS DIAL UP VPN FAST FORWARD k you will lose a io Web Mail KS Virus Definitio
77. left side of any WebConfig screen The Workstations screen displays WORKSTATIONS IP Address Workstation Names Action No workstations found yet NEW SCAN 2 Because scanning for workstations can waste bandwidth especially across a VPN no workstations display in the list Click on the New Scan button to view an updated list of workstations The following screen displays NOTICES A workstation scan is now in progress This may take up to 1 minute You can Refresh this list whenever you want 3 Click Refresh on the bottom of the screen after a few seconds to view the updated list Workstations will only be shown in the list if they are connected to the network Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 235 Workstation Viewer Virtual Network Computing VNC Using free Windows software called Virtual Network Computing VNC you can configure Windows Mac and Unix workstations so they can be controlled remotely from a central workstation If users need help or settings need to be changed an administrator does not have to physically go and sit in front of the workstation in question Because this remote administration software is also compatible with VPNs the administrator does not have to be on the same network or even in the same city Computers with a VNC remote administration server installed appear with the words Remote Admin next to them on the Workstations screen WORKSTATIONS IP Address
78. network settings general 49 domain names 50 host names 50 public DNS server 50 rsync 50 SNMP 50 time setting 51 Network Time Protocol 50 NFS file server 90 Notices box 47 NTP 50 0 Operating Conditions 1 P Password Policy 82 Perl script 155 permissions 90 PHP License 381 383 PHP script 155 phpMyAdmin 257 managing databases 258 POP3 configuration of 122 mailboxes 67 68 server 119 130 131 port numbers common 246 positive web filtering 169 Power 11 power connection power up sequence 19 supply cord 11 power connection Net Integrator 15 PPTP 212 print services 115 configuring your workstation 115 proxy servers 241 public DNS server 50 R realtime blackhole list RBL 120 remote access services 211 dial in connection 218 dial in service 218 VPN connection 213 VPN service 212 Replace Security Certificate 162 Restore 183 restrict outgoing traffic 223 rsync 275 S secure web services 162 shutdown button 252 simple network management protocol SNMP 50 Smarthost 119 123 SMTP server 119 130 230 configuration of 121 Software Activation Keys 39 software update 63 191 SSL Certificate 162 SSL encryption 162 static IP addresses 242 SystemER 254 hard disk failure 254 installing a new hard drive 255 T TCP IP workstation configuration 26 for Mac OS 9 34 for Mac OS X 36 for Windows 2000 XP 30 for Windows 95 98 ME 26 team accounts 67 77 creation of 78 deletion of 82 editing 81 service integration
79. notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Ralf S Engelschall lt rse engelschall com gt for use in the mod ssl project http www modssl org 4 The names mod ssl must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact rse engelschall com 5 Products derived from this software may not be called mod ssl nor may mod ssl appear in their names without prior written permission of Ralf S Engelschall 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Ralf S Engelschall lt rse engelschall com gt for use in the mod_ssl project http www modssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY RALF S ENGELSCHALL AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 369 THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL RALF S ENGELSCHALL OR HIS CONTRIBUTORS BE
80. of routing or deliver ing packets between them Hypertext Markup Language A set of tags and instructions used to create web pages HTML tags create page layouts format text insert graphics and multimedia and more Hypertext Transfer Protocol A protocol that makes hypertext information such as web pages available over the Internet A apiece of hardware that connects computers together in a LAN allowing information to travel between them A gateway for accessing the Internet which is loosely defined as points of entrance to and exit from a communications network A gateway is the node that translates between two otherwise incompatible networks or network segments Gateways perform code and protocol conversion to facilitate traffic between data highways of differing architecture A gateway can be thought of as a function within a system that enables communications with the outside world Internet Message Access Protocol A popular protocol that allows a client to access email without downloading it to a local com puter Used mainly to read email from a remote location A server that uses IMAP to provide access to multiple server side folders Internet Protocol Address The numeric address used to identify and locate a server computer or website on the Internet Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 413 IP Address Dynamic IP Address Static IPsec ISDN ISP Java JavaScript kbps LDAP A tempor
81. of the taskbar IX XE You can also double click the connection icon in the Dial Up Networking folder mm T Do not show this dialog box in the future d eee Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 215 Remote Access Services 14 Click on the Close button to minimize this window 15 You are now connected to your local network through a secure VPN Depending on your Internet connection it may take longer than normal to complete network requests The following icon showing traffic between your workstation and the Nitix powered server you are connected to displays in the bottom right corner of your screen 5 12 38 PM 16 To terminate the VPN connection double click on the icon Select Disconnect in the win dow that displays Disconnect a PPTP Connection 1 From the Services Status Snapshot screen the PPTP Connections box will display the status of all PPTP connections If there are active connections a Details link will display SERVICES STATUS SNAPSHOT Internet Status Firewall Tunnel Vision IPsec Connections PPTP Connections Seftlipdate Disk Status 3 Click on the Delete Action button of the user whose PPTP connection you want to dis connect A window will display asking Are you sure you want to disconnect username Click OK to disconnect the PPTP connection Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 216 Remote Access Services Dial in Service Configuring Dial in Servic
82. on the Make New Connection icon The following screen displays Make New Connection x Select a device e Microsoft VPN Adapter X Configure Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 213 Remote Access Services 3 Enter a name for the VPN connection You leave the default or use any name that makes sense to you Click on the Next button The following screen displays Make New Connection x Type the name or address of the VPN server Host name or IP Address 64 201 99 64 lt Back Cancel 4 Enter your Nitix powered server s host name or external IP address Enter a host name such as www example com if Nitix provides DNS resolution for your domain Enter an IP address such as 192 168 0 1 if Nitix does not provide DNS reso lution To find the external IP address select Local from the Network Setup menu On the screen that displays click on the Advanced button In the Network Devices section of the screen that displays look at the IP address of the un trusted Ethernet interface usually Eth 5 Click on the Next button The following screen displays Make New Connection x You have Seem created a new Dial Up Networking connection called Click Finish to save it in your Dial Up Networking folder Double click it to connect To edit this connection later click it click the File menu and then click Properties lt Back Cancel 6 Click on
83. on the road You can take advantage of RAS with e a VPN which requires the Internet and a PPTP client OR adial in connection which requires a dial up modem and a phone line Please Note Windows has a Point to Point Tunneling PPTP client built in You have to buy a separate Software package if you are using a Macintosh In order to establish a remote connection users have to have PPTP or dial in access Refer to Creating Users in Chapter 7 User amp Team Management for more information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 211 Remote Access Services PPTP Client to Server VPN Service Configuring VPN Service on Nitix 1 Select VPN from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The VPN Setup screen displays Tunnel Vision Use Fully Meshed Mode Tunnel Vision Address of Master Server Tunnel Vision Password Re enter Tunnel Vision Password IPSEC SETUP t SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Enable the PPTP server by selecting Yes 3 Click on the Save Changes button Configuring VPN Service in Windows Before you can establish a VPN connection you have to install VPN service on your Win dows 95 98 Me workstation Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations already have VPN services installed 1 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel Double click on the Add Remove programs icon 2 The Add Remove Programs Properties screen displays
84. or Move Up button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 153 WebMail Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 154 RE Web Services Web Server Nitix s high performance web server is based on the industry standard Apache web server and it supports CGI scripts Perl and PHP are also integral parts of Nitix s web services For more information on Perl go to http www perl com For more information about PHP go to http www php net Nitix provides web services on a Master Web Server and on Virtual Web Servers Master Web Server What is the Master Web Server The master web server is designed to serve your Intranet site and the personal web pages of your Nitix users Although it is possible to make these sites available to outside users you may choose to keep them private for security reasons Master web services are provided from IP addresses assigned to Nitix s internal and external network interfaces If the web server is enabled and access is granted to outside users anyone accessing the Nitix powered server s internal or external IP address from a web browser can access information on the master server Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 155 Web Services Webmaster Directory A Webmaster team is created and configured as the master web server administrator When the Webmaster team is created a shared network directory called Webmaster is made avail able to all members of the Webmaster team and th
85. or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also compile or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copy right notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the c
86. packets and then transport those packets from one computer to another on the Internet How does a computer know what to do when it receives an IP packet Somehow it needs to figure out what service it belongs to and which open connection it s involved in For that it uses two higher level protocols known as TCP Transport Control Protocol and UDP User Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 239 Fastforward Datagram Protocol TCP and UDP introduce port numbers which specify where the data is supposed to go and how the computer is supposed to handle it FastForward can handle both TCP and UDP It processes them differently from each other but you don t need to worry about this for configuration purposes User Datagram Protocol Using UDP is very much like sending a telegram You receive a message and you may send a reply The DNS Domain Name Service mentioned earlier uses UDP One computer sends a message asking to translate a name say www example com into a number The answer ing DNS server sends a message saying that the IP address of www example com is 192 168 1 1 Query LI m E Response Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 240 Fastforward Transport Control Protocol Using TCP is very much like making a telephone call A person calls you and you answer You go through a intr
87. provide authentication ser vices for the computers on the network When this function is enabled the Windows file server is set up as a domain controller and a domain will replace the Windows work group For specific information on configuring domain controllers please see Chapter 10 NT Domain Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 58 Configuring Nitix Configuring your Internet Connection Configuring a Dial up Modem 1 Select Dial up from the Network Status menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Dial up Networking Setup screen displays DIAL UP NETWORKING SETUP Ce gt Jef Sm TP on eth DETECT MODEMS Optional If you have an external modem connected you may need to click on the Detect Modems button to initiate the Modem Detection Cycle Refer to Chapter 6 DoubleVision for information on using multiple dial up modems Please Note If modem undetected check cables power etc Cycle power on modem and initiate a new Detect Modems test Refer to FAQ for more troubleshooting tips Click on the Modem 1 Action button The following screen displays DIAL UP NETWORKING SETUP Intemet Provider s Phone Number Dial automatically when someone tries to reach the Intemet Emulate Windows Dial up Networking Allow Dial In connections ves No SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Enter the phone number provided by your ISP If you have to dial 9 to get an outside l
88. rather than local passwords The Windows NT domain stores all user account and security information in a central data base When a user logs on to Nitix the Windows NT domain authenticates the username and password against the information in the directory database This means you don t need to maintain a separate directory database for both Nitix and Windows systems Nitix users can access their network files from both Windows and Nitix systems with the same username and password All administration can be done with Windows NT When you join a Windows NT domain Nitix will automatically create user accounts on the Nitix server for NT domain users These users require Nitix Client Access Licenses CALs See Chapter 5 Client Access Licenses for more information Please Note The Nitix Domain Controller feature must be disabled for the domain member to function Configuring the Domain Member To enable Nitix s domain member function Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 101 NT Domain Services 1 Select File under Server Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays FILE SERVER SETUP Virus Scanner Enable Macintosh file server yes ONo Enable Windows file server 7 ONo c Windows workgroup domain WORKGROUP Actas Domain Member 2 ONo Domain Member Admin usernam Administrator Domain Member Admin password HN Domain Member Re enter admin pa
89. responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simul taneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section 1s held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum stance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of pro Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 344 tecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have mad
90. s shared files can be automatically mounted to when one of its members logs into a domain workstation The default None does not mount the files to ensure that there are no conflicts with drive space Please Note For more information see Chapter 10 NT Domain Services 11 Select a Ouota Value for this team Please Note For more information see Chapter 9 Disk Quotas 12 Select the members of the team Team membership gives full access to the team s shared directory 13 Click on the Save Changes button The Main User Setup page re displays The team dis plays in the list of previously created teams Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 80 User amp Team Management Editing Teams 1 On the Main User Setup screen click on the appropriate team s Edit Action button 2 The Modify Team screen displays MODIFY TEAM Team D Re enter Password Allow FTP Access Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Team Members Test E Mail CONVERT TO USER E MAIL 3 Change team information as appropriate Refer to Creating Teams in this chapter for a description of the fields on this screen 4 Click on Send to send this team a test email 5 Click on Convert to User to convert this team into a user 6 Click on the Save Changes button Convert to User Clicking on Convert to User on the Modify User screen will convert a user into a team of the same name Convert to Team Clicking on C
91. section 6c Linux Access Control Lists section 6c Linux Extended Attributes section 6c MySQL section 6c Netatalk section 6c Quick Database Manager section 6c XPLC section 6c ppp This software was developed by Gregory M Christy HPT370 370A 372 372A ATA RAID Controller Linux Driver PT37x UDMA ATA RAID Controller Linux Driver Internet Software Consortium DHCP LInux LOader Linux PAM mod_auth_pam for Apache HTTP server mod ssl for Apache HTTP server This product includes software developed by Ralf S Engelschall for use in the mod ssl program nForce nvnet OpenLDAP OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit OSSP mm ppp This software was developed by Pedro Roque Marques Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 300 PHP License v 2 02 PHP License v 3 0 Rick Kaseguma License RSA License SSLeay License Strace License Sun Microsystems License University of Utah and the Regents of the University of California License Universtiy of Chicago License University of Michigan License University of Washington s Free Fork License v 2003 VPB Software License Zend Engine License v 200 Zlib License Date DB HTML Common HTML Select Log Mail Net SMTP Net Socket PHP sslwrap Ppp Open SSL This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young sslwrap This product includes cryptographic software wri
92. specific prior written per mission Disclaimer THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBU TORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI RECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 365 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER WISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Note The above license is copied from the BSD license at http www opensource org licenses bsd license html substituting the appropriate references in the template Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 366 Appendix T mod auth pam License Copyright Ingo Luetkebohle All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in b
93. status of all PPTP connections and provides an option to disconnect active connections Displays the status of the subsystem that automatically checks for available software updates When the subsystem is active and retrieving a list of available software updates the status light is bright green When the subsystem is operational but idle the status light is gray A red status light indicates a problem with the subsystem usu ally an inability to access the distribution server Refer to Chapter 29 Log Messages for more information on download errors Displays the status of your disk configuration provides disk reconfiguration options displays the status of a rebuilding RAID array and displays idb drive hotswap status Displays the status of the idb backup disk It will display how much of the idb disk space is currently available for backups and when the next backup is scheduled to be done Displays if there are any users over their quota limit See Quota Setup in Chapter 7 User and Team Management for more information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 43 Connecting to WebConfig User Authenti cation Method WebMail Virus Definition Updates DNS Server FastForward WWW Server Secure WWW Server Displays the method of authentication currently enabled It will display Using nor mal password authentication if Nitix is in Domain Controller Mode or Non Domain mode It will display Using the domainname
94. that contains the LPGL text header is LGPL 2 Any other software in this package in source or object executable firmware form is not LGPL A license is provided to use this non LGPL software ONLY with Voicetronix hard ware It may not be used without Voicetronix hardware nor may it be modified in any way to be used without Voicetronix hardware Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 405 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 406 Appendix AM Zend Engine License version 2 00 Copyright 1999 2002 Zend Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification is permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The names Zend and Zend Engine must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior permission from Zend Technol ogies Ltd For written permission please contact license zend com 4 Zend Technologies Ltd may publish revised and or new versions of the license from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once covered code has been publi
95. the Finish button You have created an icon that activates a VPN connection to your home network through your Nitix powered server Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 214 Remote Access Services 7 Right click on the icon that you just created and select Properties In the window that dis plays click on the Server Types tab 8 In the Advanced options section of the screen ensure that only the following are checked Enable software compression Require encrypted password Require data encryption 9 In the Allowed network protocol section of the screen ensure that only TCP IP is checked Click on the OK button 10 Once you are connected to the Internet establish a VPN connection to the internal net work by double clicking the icon that you created in step 6 11 The following window displays Enter your Nitix login name and password Click on the Connect button Connect To x FE NITI VPN User name psmith Password eooo Save password VPN server 64 201 99 64 cma 12 The following window showing you the progress of the connection displays e Connecting to NITI YPN x ELE Status Verifying user name and Cancel me password 13 The following window displays when a VPN connection is successfully established Connection E stablished x You are connected to NITI VPN To disconnect or to view status information double click the dial up icon in the status area
96. this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each lic ensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conve niently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another lan guage Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 339 Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
97. this screen you can add edit and delete address entries See AddressBook for more information Calendar to view your personal calendar See Calendar for more information Tasks to view your list of tasks See Tasks for more information Notes to view your notes See Notes for more information Home to return to the Main Webmail Menu Logout button to log out of WebMail Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 139 WebMail 2 To give a message a specific status such as seen or unseen select an option from the Select list or place a check in a message s checkbox and select an option from the Mark as list 3 Place a check in the Message Checkbox to select one or more messages 4 To delete or undelete a message place a check in its message checkbox and then click on the Delete or Undelete button 5 To block messages from a specific person place a check in the message s checkbox and click on the Blacklist button See Mail Filters for more information 6 The Message List displays information pertaining to received messages Click on a link in the From or Subject section of the screen to open a message 7 To sort the messages in your inbox click on the Date From Subject or Size message headings 8 To open a folder select it from the list and click on the Open Folder button 9 To move or copy a message to another folder place a check in its message checkbox and then click on the Move or Copy button 1
98. to work the web server must have a file with a security certificate This file is unique to every web server and in order for encryption to properly work the certifi cate has to be issued by a proper Certificate Authority When the user loads a secure page its certificate is compared to the certificate held by the Certificate Authority if they match the site is considered trusted and encrypted communication can commence You can purchase SSL security certificates from a number of internet security companies like Entrust nttp www entrust com and VeriSign http www verisign com Nitix 5 Security Certificates The security certificates that Nitix generates can be checked for authenticity by all web browsers The security certificate generated by Nitix is placed in the Webmaster directory and named certificate pem A user loading the first secure web page from the server is warned that this security certifi cate is valid but that the company issuing it cannot be considered trusted The user has to manually approve the continuation of the transaction Despite this warning information exchanged between the web browser and the web server cannot be viewed by others Please Note If you purchase a security certificate from a Certificate Authority delete the file automati cally created by Nitix and replace it with the one you purchased See the SSL Certificate section in this chapter You may also want to store a copy of the purchased
99. to your addressbook Click on Back to Inbox to return to your inbox Replying to a Message 1 After opening and reading a message click on Reply or Reply to all Your choice depends on the intended recipient s The Reply screen displays Please Note The Reply screen is the same as the Message Composition screen except that the previous correspondence displays Refer to Composing an Email Message in this chapter for infor mation about this screen Enter your reply Click on the Save Draft button if you want to save this message in your Drafts folder Click on the Send button to send the message to the recipient Please Note Clicking on the Cancel button prior to sending the email aborts the message Search Function WebMail s Search function allows you to search for a message or set of messages using spe cific criteria Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 144 WebMail 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Search button The Search screen displays Message fields Message folders From Select all Select none To r Se Cc r Subject r r r Body Received on Received before z z Received after z C Old messages C New messages Both C Answered messages C Unanswered messages Both C important messages Not important messages Both C Deleted messages Notdeleted messages Both FO Tasks Enter information into the appropriate Message fields Select the appropriate Message
100. way However if you plan to use web filtering in conjunction with web caching all proxy server settings must be removed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 167 Web Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 168 Chapter 15 Web Filtering Positive Web Filtering Positive Web Filtering is a service provided by Nitix that allows the system administrator to allow access to specific Internet sites while blocking access to all others Enabling the Web Filter 1 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP O Only Trusted Hosts S No Dymamic Enable WWW server Enable secure WWW server Enable MySQL Server Enable users personal home pages Choose a team to act as webmaster Web Proxy port 0 to let Nitix HW choose a s dedu NENNEN ONo 0 to disable VIRTUAL DOMAINS SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 In the Enable content filtering field select Yes 3 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 169 Web Filtering 4 Click on Configure The Web Filtering screen displays WORKSTATIONS EXEMPT FROM FILTERING Workstation Action CONTENT FILTERING REQUESTS Requests Us additional CONTENT FILTERING REQUEST DENIALS Denials 1 filter request has been denied REFRESH MITTED WEB SITES Web Site Acti
101. www strataware com All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documenta tion advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowl edge that the software was developed by Eric Rosenquist The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 329 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 330 opera GNU General Public License Version 2 June 1991 Copyright 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This Gen eral Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any
102. 0 To move a message to your trash folder place a check in its message checkbox and then click on the Hide Deleted button You can show them again by clicking on the Show Deleted button To empty the contents of the trash folder click on the Purge Deleted but ton Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 140 WebMail Configuring WebMail 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Options button The Options screen displays Your Information Mail Management Other Options Personal Information Change the name address and signature that people see when they read and reply to your email Server Information Change mail server settings Create filtering rules to organize your incoming mail sort it into folders and delete spam Deleting and Moving Messages Set preferences for what happens when you move and delete messages Maintenance Operations Customize maintenance operations run upon Display Options Change display options such as how many messages you see on each page and how messages are sorted Message Composition Customize how you send mail and where drafts are saved Login Tasks Customize tasks to run upon logon to Mail New Mail Control when new mail will be checked for and whether or notto notify you when it arrives Addressbooks Select addressbook sources for adding and searching for addresses 2 Click on any ofthe headings such as Personal Information Filters and Display Options
103. 00 From anyuser2 weavernet null amp To anyusergweavernet null amp Subject Contract Part s B 2 contract doc application octet stream 32 16 KB Download Hi Attached is the final version of the contract for your files Regards Delete Reply Reply to All Forward Redirect Blacklist Message Source Save as Print Back to INBOX Xl This message to F 2 You have many options after reading the message Click on Delete to send this message to your trash folder Reply to send a reply to the person that sent you the message Reply to all to send a reply to everyone who received the message Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 143 WebMail e Forward to forward this message to another recipient Redirect to send this message directly to another recipient without the opportu nity to add comments Blacklist to create a rule that sends mail from this person to your trash folder instead of your inbox See Mail Filters for more information Message Source to open a window that displays information about this email e Print to print this message The message displays in another window and a Print window appears Click on OK to print your message To move or copy this message to another folder select the appropriate folder from the drop down list and click on the Move or Copy button To auto add a contact from the received mail click on the book icon beside the email address and it will be added
104. 169 Providing Full Internet Access 170 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Adding Permitted Websites 171 Accepting Access Requests 171 Denying Access Requests 172 Entering Access Requests 173 FTP Services 175 FTP Server 175 Anonymous FTP Server 175 Enabling the FTP Server 176 Enabling FTP Access 177 User vs Team FTP Access 177 Backup amp Restore 179 Intelligent Disk Backup idb 179 Configuring idb 180 Initiating an idb Backup 181 idb Restore 183 Initiating an idb Restore 184 idb Backup Teams 188 idb Hot Swap 189 Swapping idb Hard Disks with Hot Swap 190 Swapping idb Hard Disks without Hot Swap 190 Software Update 191 Software Updates 191 Upgrading Nitix 191 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Chapter 22 TunnelVision 195 Private Networks 195 Virtual Private Networks 195 VPN Network Topologies 196 How TunnelVision Works 199 Creating a VPN server to server 200 Configuring a TunnelVision Master Server 201 Configuring a TunnelVision Client 202 TunnelVision Status 204 The Idle Time out 204 IPsec 205 IPsec An alternative to TunnelVision 205 Known Configurations 205 Adding an IPsec route 205 Adding an Anonymous Incoming Connection IPsec route 207 Editing an IPsec route 208 Setting up Third Party IPsec Clients 210 Remote Access Services 211 What is RAS 211 PPTP Client to Server VPN Service 212 Dial in Service 217 Terminating a Connection from WebConfig 221 Fir
105. 4 mai Sharedkey Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS SAVE CHANGES al CANCEL CHANGES 2 In the Remote server field enter the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the remote server you wish to connect to 3 To include a private subnet behind the remote server s firewall enter the internal IP address of the remote unit as well as the subnet in the Remote subnet field For example if the unit s internal IP address is 192 168 10 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 you would enter 192 168 10 0 24 Please Note To tunnel only to the remote server and not to a subnet behind it leave the IPsec Remote Server field blank or enter the remote server s IP address from the first field 4 Enter your Remote IKE key key 5 From the Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK field select PSK Please Note The RSA key feature is still under development therefore we recommend that you only use Preshared Secret Keys PSK 6 Enable the Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS feature Please Note It must be set the same way on both ends of the connection The IPsec protocols do not provide a method for the two ends to negotiate this so you must ensure to set it correctly 7 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 209 IPsec Setting up Third Party IPsec Clients Nitix Setup With the large number of
106. 4 0 176 FTP Services Enabling FTP Access 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main Setup screen displays TEAM SETUP USER SETUP User ID Teams PPTP Dial In Exchangelt Emails ADD NEW USER ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY 2 Click on the appropriate user or team s Edit Action button 3 The Modify Users or Modify Teams screen displays 4 Indicate whether or not you want this user or team to have FTP access in the Allow FTP access field 5 Click on the Save Changes button 6 Repeat steps 2 5 for any additional users or teams User vs Team FTP Access Users may log into Nitix s FTP server by entering their assigned username and password in order to access their own user directory Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 177 FTP Services If the user wishes to access the directory of any team for which they are a member the user need to user the team name in place of their username but continue to use their individual password rather than needing use a team password Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 178 Chapter 17 Backup amp Restore Please Note The Net Integrator Micro does not support Intellingent Disk Backup idb backups Intelligent Disk Backup idb Nitix takes a different approach to backup with idb technology which is both cheaper and easier to use than conventional tape backup systems The capacity of the
107. AID configuration then the RAID array will begin to rebuild This process which can take up to two hours does not noticeably affect the performance of Nitix Reconfiguring your disks You are able to reconfigure your disk at any time The Disk Status section of WebConfig s System Status screen displays your disk status and provides you with disk reconfiguration options Converting an idb disk to RAID You can only convert an idb disk to part of a RAID array if your Nitix powered server has exactly two disks If you have 3 or more disks you cannot convert an idb disk to RAID IMPORTANT Converting your idb disk to part of a RAID array means that you lose idb backup capabili ties In addition the backup information that is stored on the idb disk is permanently deleted 1 The Disk Status section of the System Status screen has a link telling you that you can configure your last disk to your RAID array to improve redundancy Click on this link 2 The RAID array then begins to rebuild This process which can take up to two hours does not noticeably affect the performance of Nitix Click on your browser s Refresh but ton to view an updated status of your RAID array AID d orremove any disks until this process is finished 1 complete Disk Status e d 3 When the array has finished building the following displays in the Disk Status section of the screen Your disk a s working correctly Disk Status You can Nitix
108. AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conve niently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another lan guage Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Fora library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a progra
109. ATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 356 Appendix Gregory M Christy License Copyright Gregory M Christy All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documenta tion advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowl edge that the software was developed by Gregory M Christy The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 357 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 358 Appendix P HighPoint License Copyright HighPoint Technologies Inc All rights reserved NO WARRANTY THE DRIVER SOURCE CODE HIGHPOINT PROVIDED IS FREE OF CHARGE AND THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM THERE ARE NO RESTRICTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS FREE SOURCE CODE HIGHPOINT DOES NOT PROVIDE ANY TECHNICAL SUPPORT I
110. BLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 346 Appendix N GNU Library General Public License Version 2 June 1991 Copyright 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the library GPL It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Library General Public License applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it You can use it for your libraries too When we speak of free software we are referri
111. CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if ser vice is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 44 Connecting to WebConfig Windows File Displays the status of file services for Windows and NT clients The number of ses Server sions displayed represents the number of active users currently connected to Nitix and utilizing file services The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much proces sor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service Apple File Displays the status of file services for Apple Macintosh clients The number of ses Server sions displayed represents the number of users currently connected to Nitix and uti lizing file services The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is dis abled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service NFS File Server Displays the status of the NFS file server for UNIX and similar systems The number of sessions displayed represents the number of active users cu
112. Configuring VNC There are two parts to configuring remote administration 1 VNC Server which should be installed on every user s workstation 2 VNC Viewer which should be installed on the administrator s workstation Once the servers and viewers are configured clicking the Remote Admin link on the Work stations screen connects you to the remote VNC server and displays the remote desktop Configuring the VNC server 1 Download VNC from the Internet Go to http www realvnc com download html OR e http download cnet com and search for VNC Please Note For the MAC version go to http www chromatix uklinux net vnc Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 236 Workstation Viewer 2 The file comes in a zipped format Unzip the file in a temporary location for installation Run the Setup program and follow the screens Accept all defaults during the installation process 3 When installation is finished reboot the workstation 4 From the Start menu select Applications gt VNC and start VNC App mode 5 The first time you start VNC you will have to set up a password which is needed in order to connect to your workstation 6 When VNC is active a small VNC icon displays in the bottom right corner of your screen Configuring the VNC viewer for the Administrator s Workstation 1 Download VNC from the Internet and configure the VNC server Look for vncviewer exe and copy it somewhere obvious such as c wi
113. E THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 336 En GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute ve
114. ES These hus can be backed up Team autoinstall Team exchangeit admin Team log Team test_test Team webmaster PERFORM BACKUP SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 182 Backup amp Restore 5 6 Indicate which directories you want to backup by selecting the Yes button Please Note Click on the Save Changes button to save your selections This does not initiate the backup procedure Click on the Perform Backup button to initiate the backup procedure When the backup is finished Nitix automatically emails a backup report to the administrator Initiating a Backup from a Net Integrator Control Panel Please Note This can only be done with Net Integrator Mark and Mark II servers All other hardware platforms must initiate a backup from the system s WebConfig menu 1 idb Restore Press the Backup button on the front display panel The display panel shows a 10 second countdown during which you can stop the backup process by pressing the Cancel button After 10 seconds the backup procedure commences and the display panel console shows a progress bar Please Note You can delay backup for up to 24 hours by pressing the Up and Down arrows during the countdown There are three restore scenarios 1 Complete System Restore Upon total hard disk failure perform a complete system restore to restore your system to the state of your most recent bac
115. Ethernet connects computers in a local area network LAN An Ethernet connection is very fast and unlike modem and ISDN connections one Ethernet network can have many com puters attached to it There are two different kinds of Ethernet cables category 3 and category 5 are two examples It is recommended that you use category 5 at minimum for 100baseT networks and category 5e at minimum for 1000baseT networks 10baseT 100baseT and 1000baseT hubs and switches have a number of ports that you con nect to workstations routers servers printers or other devices using Ethernet cables Con nect your Net Integrator to a free port using one of the supplied category 5 cables If the port lights up after you connect and then turn on your Net Integrator you have a proper connec tion You can cascade more hubs or switches to increase the number of available ports consult the manual that comes with your hub switch before trying this Connecting Ethernet Port 0 1 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable into Ethernet Port 0 on your Mark I and Mark II or LAN I on your Micro located on the back of your Net Integrator Mark I Mark II 2 Connect the other end of the cable into your LAN hub or switch Please Note Ethernet Port O LAN 1should not be connected to a router providing Internet access Ether net Port 0 LAN7 is typically used reserved for internal Local Network access Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 16 First time Nitix Se
116. F THE CODE HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM ORIGI NAL SOURCE CODE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL HIGHPOINT BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN PARTICULAR HIGHPOINT SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE SOFTWARE OR DATA STORED USED WITH THE PRODUCT INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING REPLAC ING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE OR DATA Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 359 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 360 Appendix Q Internet Software Consortium License Copyright The Internet Software Consortium All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of The Internet Software Consortium nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INTERNET
117. IBUTORS OF THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCU MENTATION EVEN IF THE AUTHORS OR ANY OF THE ABOVE PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE AUTHOR THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA AND THE UNIVERSITY OF UTAH SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM ITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN AS IS BASIS AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE NO OBLIGA TION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE SUPPORT UPDATES ENHANCEMENTS OR MODIFICATIONS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 401 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 402 Appendix AK University of Washington 5 Free Fork License University of Washington IMAP toolkit Version 2003 of IMAP toolkit Copyright 1988 2003 University of Washington This University of Washington Distribution code and documentation is made available to the open source community as a public service by the University of Washington Contact the University of Washington at imap license cac washington edu for information on other licensing arrangements e g for use in proprietary applications Under this license this Distribution may be modified and the original version and modified versions may be copied distributed publicly displayed and performed provided that th
118. ICES wdump2 format PWDump2 Generated Users pem pem Syntactically Generated Users I Users that will be deleted SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 12 Click on Save Changes 13 Because Windows utilizes a one way hash algorithm for storage of passwords the pass words are not easily recovered The Administrator will need to create new passwords by Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 75 User amp Team Management clicking on the left button in the Action column in the row containing a user s informa tion This screen will display MODIFY USER term ne Re enter Password aa Allocate Exchangeli License y Automatically mount files as EIS Quota Value Test E Mail CONVERT TO TEAM E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 14 Enter the new password into the appropriate fields Click Save Changes Modifying User Email Settings 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main User Setup screen displays 2 Click on the appropriate user s Action button The Modify Users screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 76 User amp Team Management 3 Click on the E mail button on the bottom of the screen The E mail Setup screen dis plays E MAIL SETUP Retrieve ETE mail example com POP Server A Re enter _ POP password Forward to B this E Mail Address Keep
119. IPsec servers available we cannot provide configuration parame ters for each device on the market The following is the best configuration for allowing a Nitix powered server to create a virtual private network VPN with third party devices Remote server Enter the external IP address of the remote unit Remote subnet Enter the internal IP address of the remote unit as well as the subnet For example if the unit s internal IP address is 192 168 10 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 you would enter 192 168 10 0 24 Remote IKE key Enter your shared key that is being used Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key PSK Select PSK Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Select Yes Third Party IPsec Client Setup Encryption Tunnel 3DES and MD5 Security Association SA Lifetime set to 3600 seconds Mode If there are different modes available select Main Mode Private Key Secret Use preshared secret keys PSK not RSA keys or other keys such as PKI as these are not supported on Nitix Perfect Forward Secrecy Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS must be enabled on both ends of the connection The IPsec protocols do not provide a method for the two ends to nego tiate this so you must ensure to set it correctly Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 210 Raser Remote Access Services What is RAS Remote Access Services RAS is a Nitix subsystem that allows you to access the internal network while at home or
120. ITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSI NESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABIL ITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealing in this Software without specific written prior per mission Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 375 OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation Copyright 1999 2001 The OpenLDAP Foundation Redwood City California USA All Rights Reserved Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 376 Appendix X OpenSSL License Copyright 1998 2004 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclai
121. LDAP server provides a directory of users names and email addresses Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 414 LAN Mbps MX Record NetBIOS NAT NFS NIC NTP Local Area Network A LAN links together computers that are in the same building 10BaseT Ethernet is the most common LAN See also Hub Megabits per Second millions of bits per second This is a measure of bandwidth the amount of data that can flow in a given time on a data trans mission medium Mail Exchange Record A DNS resource record type that indicates which host can handle mail for a particular domain Network Basic Input Output System A protocol for networking on IBM PC and compatible systems Network Address Translation NAT allows one publicly visible IP address to refer to many IP addresses internally on a LAN making it look like all traffic was generated by a single external IP address Network File System A protocol developed by Sun Microsystems which allows a computer to access files over a net work as if they were on its local drive Network Interface Card An adapter card that physically connects a computer to a network cable Network Time Protocol An Internet standard protocol built on top of TCP IP that assures accurate synchronization to the millisecond of computer clock times in a network of computers Running as a continuous background client program on a computer the NTP client sends periodic time requests to ext
122. Layer SSL is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet WebMail Server a system that allows users to securely access their email from any workstation on the Internet using a standard web browser The web mail server uses SSL encryption to secure online transactions Refer to Chapter 13 WebMail for more infor mation LDAP Server a directory system that holds the names and email addresses of all users on the Nitix powered server This directory can be searched with any standard email client The LDAP server does not store names and email addresses of users not connected to the Nitix powered server Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 119 Email Services e Real time Blackhole List RBL a spam blocker that has different levels of spam protection Strong and Medium e Mail Virus Scanner scans all outgoing and incoming mail for viruses If a virus is found it is immediately removed from the email A warning is then sent to the sender and all recipients along with the original but virus free message You must buy the Virus Protect license for Nitix for this feature to be enabled Mail Logging This option when enabled will automatically make a copy of all incoming and outgoing mail into an archive A privacy warning which cannot be edited is appended to all incoming and outgoing email indicating that a copy of the email message has been saved by the server T
123. License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compli ance Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 353 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However noth ing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modify ing or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your accep tance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues cond
124. Lists 90 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Disk Quotas 97 Setting Default Disk Quota Values 97 Setting Individual User Disk Quotas 98 Quota Limit 99 NT Domain Services 101 What is a Windows NT Domain Member 101 Configuring the Domain Member 101 What is a Domain Controller 103 Configuring the Domain Controller 103 Joining Windows Systems toa Domain 105 File Mounting Drive Mapping 111 Logon Scripts 112 Automated Drive Mapping 113 Workstation Administrative Rights 113 Print Services 115 Nitix Print Services 115 Configuring Print Services 115 Configuring your Workstation 116 Email Services 119 Components ofthe Email System 119 Configuring Email Service 121 Clearing the Email Queue 124 Configuring Email Aliases 124 Configuring DNS Records 128 Configuring Email Clients 129 Advanced Email Settings 131 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 LDAP Server 132 WebMail 135 WebMail Server 135 Enabling WebMail Server 135 Accessing WebMail 137 Configuring WebMail 141 Composing an Email Message 142 Opening a Received Message 143 Replying toa Message 144 Search Function 144 Address Book 146 Calendar 147 Tasks 149 Notes 151 Mail Filters 151 Web Services 155 Web Server 155 Master Web Server 155 Virtual Web Servers 159 Hosting Multiple Web Sites 161 Secure Web Services 162 SSL Certificate 162 Web Caching 167 Web Filtering 169 Positive Web Filtering 169 Enabling the Web Filter
125. MROwGwYDVQQDEXxR3 YW5rZzXIud2VhdmVy bm VOLm51bDETMBEGCgmSJomTGixkARKTA3NmZzDCBnz ANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAAOB jOAugYkCgYEAu Kg61lYeYqHgUaBYatfgzRZdgIpRSDYK3todg6q 3WFsnvL jZaqums pYquBmZziKiS9GlKKlnsXfqkb980vmoO61gU2No0c4Uc99ccfsTT jKD10jceWUdtJR CDSH2Z12FcKO TOPCtPfYCbK4ZK60O0EeBqoZ vHfjJXI Zq4B8208jUpUCAwvEAAaNp MGcwEQYJYIZIAYb4QgEBBAQODAgZAMCMGCUCGSAGG EIBDAQUFhR3YUSrZXIud2Vh diiV ybriVOLm5 1bD AOBGNVHOSBALSEBANCAqQQwHOYDVRO 1BBYwF AYIKwYBBQUHAWEG CCsGAQUFBWMCHAOGCSGGSIB3DOEBBQUAA4GBAHUOATYLCIKMelyiFzGIzWSL31HW p vol8siqg iLMc gmtBLeKflwEnjjwj7Q0ClQO0WoHLzgpGzTF8R3RO0QavoxSPaiOG 223j7HuzuVQRa4u86sAjQLdkAUpcux c MKEKQ7GS5qi8T5wRl1MyTjR5gn30Ph4T1Te ddb0lcrcAinWTcs7h MIIBuzCCASQCAQAwezEMMAOGA1UEBhMDZHNmMOwwCgYDVOOIEwNzZmQxDTALBGNV BAcTBHNmZHMxDDAKBgNVBAoTA3NmczEMMAoGA1UECxMDc2 ZKMROwGwYDVQQDExR3 YW5rzXIudZVhdnVybmVOLm51bDETMBEGComsSJomTSixkARkTASNmzDCBnzANBgkq hkiG9wOBAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEAw Kg6lYeYqHgUaSYatfgZRZdgIpRSDYK3tod g6qA3aWFsnvLjZzcemspYquBmziKi9GlKKlnsXfqkb980vmoO61gW2No0c4Uc99ccfs TT jKD10jceUdtJRCDSH2Z12FcKOTOPtPfYcbK4ZK60OEeBqoZ 4vHfjJUXI Zq4B8 208jUpUCAwEAAaALAMAOGCSqGSID3DQEBBQUAA4GBAJFf54bzO6kztIzurCynuCjsS HFnUrPzaKpViwSDgelrtRxP QywJjOy4CognPmpYj6CvvCwwxxavGv4EKkaq6frz EKTf5nOqTJOYCOycS9mGiJW5m 7NIj5eDNyAaAOH6CxWo7ZQJ2bfoE 6kBiEckan6 Py1KTFADEKCuUBnz52z3 Email Address GENERATE REQUEST Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 164 Web Services 3 Fill in your personal information in the Customize PKCS 10 C
126. Mail if Forwarding Automatic D Reply Message SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Section A 1 Retrieve Mail from POP Server e Used to POP mail from your current mail provider and or used to pull third party POP mail 1 e Yahoo Hotmail Configure by entering the full server name used to pull mail down from your ISP i e popl sympatico ca 2 Remote POP Username Enter the appropriate account credentials for the mail service you are retrieving from 3 Remote POP Password Enter password for POP account 4 Re enter POP Password e Re enter password for POP account Section B Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 77 User amp Team Management 1 Forward to this E Mail Address This is a by user mail forwarder This allows you to forward or send copies of your mail to an alternative address e g you re leaving for vacation but need your colleague to review your email for sales orders Section C 1 Keep Mail if Forwarding e Gives you the ability to keep a copy of all the mail that you have forwarded for later review or archive Default setting is YES Section D 1 Automatic Reply Message Also known as the Out of Office notification Users can automate a private reply message for any mail that gets sent to them Please Note This feature is intelligent and is designed to send a single response to each address that gets received to your mailbox I
127. NT QUEUE MANAGEMENT Queue Name Job Name Username Hostname Delete Item Move Item Choose to enable Print Services or not Without this option being set you will not be able to print using the printers attached to this server 3 Click the Save Changes button Configuring your Workstation In Windows open your Network Neighbourhood and double click on the server icon with the name of your Nitix powered server e g Paintball The following window shows the network file and print services to which you have access m 2 m uu 5 Printer webmaintainer webmaster Paintball PAINTBALL Printer 7 Double click on the printer icon The following window displays Printers Before you can use the printer PAINTBALL Printer it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 116 Print Services 3 Select Yes to configure your workstation The Add Printer Wizard displays Add Printer Wizard FOE Do pou parit hom MS 00S bored pogam eo erea 4 Select No to indicate that you are not printing from MS DOS programs Click on Next 5 Select the brand and type of printer that is connected to your Nitix powered server Click Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer docume
128. Nieewod rig Adapter Microrolt Virtusl Private Networking oe La Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 105 NT Domain Services 3 From The following network components are installed list select Client for Microsoft Networks Click on the Properties button The Client for Microsoft Networks Properties window displays Cont for Microsoft Networks Properties EIER General r Logon validation When you word will be verified on a Windows NT domain Windows NT domain MAINOFFICE r Network logon options Quick logon Windows logs you onto the network but network drives are not reconnected until you use Logon and restore network connections When you log onto the network Windows verifies that each network drive is ready for use a ces 4 Check the box for Log onto Windows NT domain and enter the name of the domain as entered in the Windows workgroup name field on the File Server Setup WebConfig screen 5 Click on the OK button The Network window displays Click on the OK button again 6 Reboot the workstation The next time you log on the login window will have an addi tional Domain field For Windows NT 1 In Windows select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The Control Panel displays J Control Panel BEE File Edit View Help hits 3l e Accessibility Add Remove Console Date Time Devices Options Programs 9 9 8 Display Fonts Internet Keyboard
129. Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 195 Tunnel Vision Making a Virtual Network Private In a conventional private network your company owns all the routers all the computers and all the phone lines involved Because the only people using the network are employees the network is secure at least in theory The Internet on the other hand is connected to any number of businesses and organizations As your private data passes through the Internet it is possible that people may intercept what you are sending In order to prevent this from happening all of the data that passes through a VPN is encrypted with the strongest encryption technology available 1024 bit RSA and 128 bit Blowfish algorithms Such encryption makes it very difficult to intercept your trans missions VPN Network Topologies Topology refers to the shape of a network or the network s layout How different nodes in a network are connected to each other and how they communicate are determined by the net work s topology A VPN allows organizations to interconnect their offices securely Appli Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 196 TunnelVision cations and data can be readily shared throughout the VPN network if desired For example you could have the accounts departments of each branch connected to each other or each
130. OT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU In no event shall Apple s total liability to You for all damages other than as may be required by applicable law under this License exceed the amount of fifty dollars 50 00 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 311 10 Trademarks This License does not grant any rights to use the trademarks or trade names Apple Apple Computer Mac Mac OS QuickTime QuickTime Streaming Server or any other trademarks service marks logos or trade names belonging to Apple collectively Apple Marks or to any trademark service mark logo or trade name belong ing to any Contributor You agree not to use any Apple Marks in or as part of the name of products derived from the Original Code or to endorse or promote products derived from the Original Code other than as expressly permitted by and in strict compliance at all times with Apple s third party trademark usage guidelines which are posted at http www apple com legal guidelinesfor3rdparties html 11 Ownership Subject to the licenses granted under this License each Contributor retains all rights title and interest in and to any Modifications made by such Contributor Apple retains all rights title and interest in and to the Original Code and any Modifications made by or on behalf of Apple Apple Modifications and such Apple Modifications will not be automatically s
131. P TCP 25 To transfer or send email messages between servers DNS TCP and UDP 53 To navigate the Internet using domain names instead of IP addresses POP3 TCP 110 To read email from a single Inbox IMAP TCP 143 To read email from a remote location All other non Remote Administration traffic from both private service and public network clients directed to or through the Nitix firewall will be dropped or denied This feature is disabled as the default setting for Nitix Once the feature is enabled users within your network will not be able to use programs that do not adhere to the above proto cols such as ICQ To enable the Restrict Outgoing Traffic option Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 224 Firewall Services 1 Select Local under Network Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Local Network Options screen displays LOCAL NETWORK OPTIONS Donain ane EET Run DHCP serveron Wet PANE Dv Enable SNMP Server read only SNMP community name Enable NIS Server Resirict outgoing connections Enable NTP Server System Time from Internet Adjust Time Zone ADVANCED SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T j 2 Enable the Restricts Outgoing Connections to configure Nitix to only allow the above outbound ports Disable to allow all outgoing traffic 3 Click on the Save Changes button Please Note Restricting outgoing traffic help
132. RD HOME T T Creating a New Forward 1 Click on the 4dd New Forward The Add Forward screen displays ADD FORWARD From Address From Port To Address To Port SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 243 Fastforward 2 Enter the source address and port number in the From Address and From Port fields Please Note If you enter Netintegrator with no space as the source address Nitix automatically uses your assigned address whether it is static or dynamic You can only attach one forward con nection to any given source address and port 3 Enter the destination address and port number in the 70 Address and To Port fields Please Note Ensure that you have entered the destination information correctly If you forward con nections to a server that isn t answering Fast Forward drops the connection 4 Click on the Save Changes button Editing a Forward 1 On the Fast Forward screen click on the appropriate forward s Edit Action button The Modify Forward screen displays 2 Change the appropriate source or destination information 3 Click on the Save Changes button Deleting a Forward 1 On the Fast Forward screen click on the appropriate forward s Delete Action button 2 To confirm the deletion click on the OK button on the window that displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 244 Fastforward Forwarding Scenarios All
133. Select the Windows Setup tab 3 Select Communications from the Components list and click on the Details button A second Components list displays showing the communications components that are already installed and those that can be installed 4 Scroll to Virtual Private Networking in the Components list Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 212 Remote Access Services If it already has a check then VPN software has already been installed Proceed to Establishing a VPN Connection fit doesn t have a check you have to install the VPN software Proceed to step 5 5 Placea check in the Virtual Private Networking box and click on the OK button 6 The Windows Setup screen re displays Click on the Apply button The software is installed automatically Reboot your computer when the software is finished installing Please Note You may be asked to insert your Windows 95 98 Me disk for additional software com ponents to be loaded Simply follow the instructions provided and refer to Microsoft Support for more information Establishing a VPN Connection In order to establish a VPN connection to your network you need to know your username and password and the IP address of your Nitix powered server s external network interface Follow these steps to establish a VPN connection in Windows 95 98 Me systems 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Dial up Networking 2 Double click
134. TERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARIS ING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 378 Appendix OSSP Project License Copyright Ralf S Engelschall lt rse engelschall com gt Copyright The OSSP Project lt http www ossp org gt Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Ralf S Engelschall lt rse engelschall com gt 4 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Ralf S Engelschall lt
135. The File Download window displays Click on the Save button Browse to the location where you wish to save the Exchangelt executable plugin Click on the Save button Assigning Clients Exchangelt licenses can be allocated statically or dynamically Dynamic licenses are assigned and returned based upon client plugin contact with the Nitix server If all licenses Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 279 Exchangelt are being used additional clients will not be able to access any of the Groupware functional ity of Exchangelt This includes sharing of calendars contacts tasks and notes To allocate a license to a user so that the user is guaranteed to maintain Exchangelt access it is recom mended that you assign the user a static license All licenses that have not been statically assigned return to the pool of dynamic licenses To see how many Exchangelt licenses you have and whether they are static assigned or dynamic unassigned 1 Log in to WebConfig 2 Select System Status from the menu on the left side of the WebConfig screen 3 Scroll down to Exchangelt Server in the Services Status Snapshot box 4 The Exchangelt Server status button should be green The description section will tell you how many licenses you currently have for example Exchangelt Server To assign licenses Please Note Administrator account required to assign new clients 1 Login to WebConfig 2 Select User Setup from the m
136. Y WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 321 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 322 Appendix H Carnegie Mellon University License Copyright Carnegie Mellon University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documenta tion advertising materials and other materials related to suchdistribution and use acknowl edge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software with out specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 323 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 324 Appendix Caldera Systems License Copyright Caldera Systems Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer Redistributions
137. Y QUALITY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF ACCURACY OF QUIET ENJOYMENT AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS APPLE AND EACH CONTRIBUTOR DOES NOT WAR RANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE COVERED CODE THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE COVERED CODE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS THAT THE OPERATION OF THE COVERED CODE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE COVERED CODE WILL BE CORRECTED NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY APPLE AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY You acknowledge that the Covered Code is not intended for use in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation commu nication systems or air traffic control machines in which case the failure of the Covered Code could lead to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage 9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCI DENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE OR YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE COV ERED CODE OR ANY PORTION THEREOF WHETHER UNDER A THEORY OF CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE PRODUCTS LIA BILITY OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF APPLE OR SUCH CONTRIBUTOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SOME JURISDIC TIONS DO N
138. aced in this directory by team mem bers are accessible to anyone on the Internet Similarly when Anonymous Upload is enabled anyone on the Internet can upload their own files to the subdirectory in the FTP directory Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 175 FTP Services Enabling the FTP Server 1 Select FTP from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The FTP Server Setup screen displays FTP SERVER SETUP Enable anonymous FTP Yves MIN Enable anonymous uploads fives no Maximum number of anonymous connections SAVE CHANGES js CANCEL CHANGES 2 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the FTP file server 3 Indicate whether or not you want to enable anonymous FTP Please Note If this option is enabled anyone can download files from the FTP directory by using anonymous as the FTP login name and their email address as the password 4 Indicate whether or not you want to enable anonymous uploads Please Note If this option is enabled anonymous users can upload files to the FTP directory Be very careful with this option 5 Enter the number of anonymous users that can be simultaneously connected to the FTP server This option is used to prevent the over utilization of Internet bandwidth We rec ommend that you leave the default setting but increase the number of anonymous users if the server is often busy 6 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version
139. aims of patents that are now or hereafter acquired owned by or assigned to Apple and ii that cover subject matter contained in the Original Code but only to the extent necessary to use reproduce and or distribute the Original Code without infringement and b in the case where You are the grantor of rights i claims of patents that are now or hereafter acquired owned by or assigned to You and ii that cover subject matter in Your Modifications taken alone or in combination with Original Code 1 2 Contributor means any person or entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications 1 3 Covered Code means the Original Code Modifications the combination of Original Code and any Modifications and or any respective portions thereof 1 4 Externally Deploy means a to sublicense distribute or otherwise make Covered Code available directly or indirectly to anyone other than You and or b to use Covered Code alone or as part of a Larger Work in any way to provide a service including but not limited to delivery of content through electronic communication with a client other than You Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 307 1 5 Larger Work means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License 1 6 Modifications mean any addition to deletion from and or change to the substance and or structure of the Original Code any previous Modifications
140. al Version 4 0 28 Connecting to WebConfig 5 Select TCP IP from the installed components list on the Network window Click on the Properties button The TCP IP Properties window displays TCPAIP Properties 2 Ix Bindings Advanced Netplos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Subnet Mess A Cancel 6 Click on the JP Address tab Select Obtain an IP address automatically 7 Click on the DNS tab Select Enable DNS 8 Select all entries in the DNS Server Search Order section of the window and click on the Remove button 9 Select all entries in the Domain Suffix Search Order section of the window and click on the Remove button 10 Select Obtain an IP address automatically 11 Click on the Gateway tab Select any entries in the Installed gateways section of the win dow and click on the Remove button 12 Click on the WINS Configuration tab Select all entries in the WINS Server Search Order section of the screen and click on the Remove button Select Use DHCP for WINS Resolu tion 13 Click on the OK button The Network window displays Click on the OK button again 14 Reboot your computer Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 29 Connecting to WebConfi
141. all jack Please Note The external modem will be auto detected when the server goes through a power up sequence Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 18 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Power up Sequence Mark I and Mark IT Please Note For Micro power up sequence please refer to Chapter 2 First Time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware 1 Press the Power button located on the front of your Net Integrator 2 Net Integrator needs a few moments to start up During the start up you will observe the following sequence of events a b c The hard drive and fans start up Net Integrator beeps several times The LCD panel will become active and the Boot Activity LED will blink as the soft ware loads Let your Net Integrator sit undisturbed while it discovers its surroundings and auto configures its network parameters Messages indicating what kind of network discov ery is being performed appear on the display panel After approximately 10 30 sec onds the IP address that Net Integrator has chosen for itself displays The number will look something like this 192 168 0 1 based on the LAN to which it s connected When the start up sequence is over the display panel shows the status of various Net Integrator systems The first line on the display panel shows Net Integrator s IP address the second line cycles messages displaying the current date time and operat ing system version You are ready to procee
142. ame www example com as a pointer to your web server Similarly if you enable the SMTP email delivery server it publishes the name mail example com Although Nitix publishes names automatically you may want to occasionally add extra names to your DNS server You may also want to add an entry that allows people to access your site without typing www before the address Please Note Changing DNS information at a registrar i e Network Solutions can often take 24 72 hours to replicate through DNS backbone Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 230 Domain Name Services Types of DNS Entries You can create four kinds of DNS entries A address Creates an entry for converting a name such as www exam ple com to an IP address such as 111 22 33 44 This is the most common type of entry NS copy from nameserver Allows you to mirror someone else s DNS server Every DNS server should have a backup server with an additional copy of the data When you register a domain name the registrar generally asks for a primary and a secondary server If someone asks you to act as their secondary DNS server you can add their domain name and primary server s IP address as an NS entry MX mail exchanger Occasionally you may want to publish a web server and a mail server with the same name but different IP addresses For example you might want people to reach you by email when they send to user exam ple com but you might w
143. ant the example com web server to point to a different address To do that you would add Address records for example com and www example com pointing to your web server and then you would add an MX entry for example com pointing to your mail server You do not need to create a separate MX entry if it will point to the same address as the Address record DR Dynamic Redirect Dynamic redirection can be used to circumvent blocked HTTP WWW ports Any WWW requests directed to the address entered as Name will be automatically redirected by a Dynamic DNS server to port 4201 on the site entered as Value This will be almost transparent for cli ents who will only notice that the hostname and port have changed slightly Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 231 Domain Name Services Creating a DNS Entry 1 2 Select DNS from the Server Setup menu The DNS List screen displays PUBLIC DNS ENTRIES _ ADD DNS PRIVATE ENTRIES Please Note To list create or edit your private DNS entries click the Private Entries button Private DNS entries are available only to the internal network and include hostnames of all the com puters the Nitix powered server can find on the local network Public DNS entries include the mail exchange MX record and entries for the un trusted external network interface Virtual WWW server DNS records will also go on the public DNS list Most of the listings both public and priva
144. are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 332 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to
145. ary IP address that is assigned to a computer by a DHCP server each time it goes online A permanent IP address that is assigned to a computer in a TCP IP network Network devices that serve multiple users such as servers routers and printers are usually assigned static IP addresses Internet Protocol Secure A type of secure connection between computers at different locations creating Virtual Private Networks See also VPN Virtual Private Network Integrated Services Digital Networking A digital communication networking system used for high speed communication with the Inter net ISDN is available through most telephone companies Internet Service Provider An organization that maintains a server directly connected to the Internet Users who are not directly connected to the Internet typically connect through an ISP Designed by Sun Microsystems Java is a programming language for adding animation and other action to web sites In order to view web sites created with Java your browser has to have Java enabled Designed by Sun Microsystems and Netscape as an easy to use supplement to Java JavaScript code can be added to standard HTML pages to create interactive documents Most modern browsers support JavaScript Kilobits per Second thousands of bits per second This is a measure of bandwidth the amount of data that can flow in a given time on a data trans mission medium Lightweight Directory Access Protocol The
146. at a free library does the Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 338 same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU oper ating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be com bined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
147. ator users will no longer be able to request access to it The administrator can include any subsection of the domain If www red blue org is requested the admin can add www red blue org red blue org or blue org Any sites ending with that domain are permitted for example if the administrator added red blue org then green red blue org would be allowed but violet blue org would not be allowed 3 To see the list of denied websites click on the Show Denial List link The following screen displays CONTENT FILTERING REQUEST DENIALS Web site Reason for Denial Action nee V jscoBack e REFRESH 4 Click on the Edit Action button to modify the website address or the reason for denial 5 Click on the Accept Action button to move the site to the permitted site list Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 172 Web Filtering Entering Access Requests 1 Enter the website into your browser s address bar Hit Enter on your keyboard If the site you are attempting to access has not been added to the Permitted Web Sites list by the sys tem administrator the following screen displays 403 Forbidden OTICES on this network and your administrator has prohibited REQUEST ACCESS 2 Click on the Request Access button The following screen displays Request Submitted Please Note Once a website has been denied access by the administrator users will no longer be able to request access to it
148. ays a list of backups and the date that the backup was performed RESTORE FILES These backups exist Action Monthly backup Micro backup Micro backup 05 45 Micro backup i 3 To view the contents of a backup file click on the Open button The following screen showing the date and time the backup was performed and the directories that can be restored displays Please Note The first entry in the Restore Files section of the screen is for System Configuration which is automatically backed up every time any backup is performed Restoring system configura Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 186 Backup amp Restore tion files will overwrite the current system configuration so be very careful with this setting It is recommended that you leave the default setting No RESTORE FILES 4 Select the appropriate directory in which the file s that you want to restore are located and click on the Open button The following screen showing the files that can be restored displays RESTORE FILES itcle_3 1f1_English dmg PERFORM RESTORE 5 Indicate which file s you want included in the restore procedure Select Yes if you want this file restored in normal mode where the file gets over written Select No if you do not want this file restored Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 187 Backup amp Restore Select Safe if you want the file restored in safe mode whe
149. b files accessed by internal users in a cache If a user requests any of these stored files Nitix serves them from the cache instead of from the original web site Internet bandwidth is used only to retrieve web pages that have not previously been viewed resulting in much faster access to the Internet Configuring Web Caching 1 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP S No Dynamic Enable users personal home pages Choose a team to act as webmaste Webmaster E Mail address Web Proxy port 0 to let the server choose Megabytes of WWW cache 0 to disable Enable content filtering VIRTUAL DOMAINS _ SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Enter the amount of data to be cached in the Megabytes of WWW cache field We recom mend that you allow 5 10 MB for every active user on the internal network Please Note Once the cache is full the oldest files are deleted to make space for new ones Con figuring the cache size to zero disables the web cache server Click on the Save Changes button For web caching to run transparently ensure that your web browser is NOT configured to use a proxy server Please Note Previous versions of Nitix required you to configure your browser to use a proxy server Although you no longer need do this web caching still functions if your browser is configured this
150. bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service IMAP and Displays the status of servers responsible for delivery of email messages from IMAP POP3 Server and POP3 mailboxes The number of sessions displayed represents the number of users currently downloading email messages from their IMAP or POP3 mailboxes The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service LDAP Server Displays the status of the LDAP server which is used to publish user names and email addresses into the internal directory The number of sessions shows how many users are connected The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if ser vice is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service Reboot Click on this button to reboot your Nitix powered server Button Shutdown Click on this button to properly shut down your Nitix powered server Failure to Button click on the Shutdown button means that your RAID array has to rebuild See Disk Status Messages in Chapter 26 Disk Management for more informa
151. be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no war ranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the pro gram under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announce ment your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exe
152. bled in open mode the team can access files using FTP from anywhere on the Internet 8 Indicate whether or not team members are allowed to establish a remote VPN PPTP or dial in modem connection to the internal network For security reasons most teams should not be able to establish a remote connection Please Note VPN services and dial in services have to be enabled before a team member can establish a VPN or dial in connection See Chapter 21 Remote Access Services for more informa tion 9 Select the appropriate group email setting Select Send to members to send team emails to all team members Select Use shared folder to store all team emails in an automatically created folder that is accessible to all team members through an IMAP client Select Act as mailing list to make the group email address act as a mailing list where others even non group members can subscribe Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 79 User amp Team Management When a mailing list is first set up no one is subscribed to it People who want to subscribe including group members must do it themselves To subscribe unsub scribe mail is sent to group subscribe example com or group unsub scribe example com The mail list files are maintained in the group s home directory under Maildir list mail The default value for a group email is to forward mail to all members 10 Ifthe domain controller is enabled choose a drive that the team
153. block messages from a specific person When you blacklist someone you are essentially creating a rule that sends their mail to your trash folder instead of your inbox 1 From your inbox place a check in the message s checkbox and click on the Blacklist but ton 2 The Filters screen displays showing the new rule in the Filter Rules section of the screen Click the button next to the new rule and the Rule Definition window will adjust to the new rule Filter Rules Apply All Rules 1 Delete messages where the From field contains johndoe example com Delete Move Down Move Up Rule Definition Field To Cc M From Subject Body Text johndoe example com Action delete message C move message to select folder Modify Reset Cancel 3 Click on the Apply All Rules button Your inbox re displays Deleting a Rule 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Options button Then click on the Filters but ton The Filters screen displays 2 Select the rule you want to delete and click on the Delete button Moving Rules Although you can apply more than one rule to a message rules are applied in the order that they appear on the Filter Rules section of the screen To move a rule up or down the list fol low these steps 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Options button Then click on the Filters but ton The Filters screen displays 2 Select the rule you want to move and click on the Move Down
154. c Folders in the Folder List 2 Double click on the User name of the person whose information you wish to access 3 Click on the Folder you wish to access Please Note Public Folders will only appear in the Folder List if you have been granted permission to access information in the public folders Information in Mail folders and Deleted Items cannot be shared To View the Permissions for a Public or Private Folder 1 Right click on the Outlook folder in the Outlook Shortcuts or Folder List and select Prop erties 2 Click the Exchangelt Permissions tab Here you will be able to view all users who have access to that folder and what Permis sion Level they have Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 295 Exchangelt To Copy Information From a Public Folder to Your Private Folder Open the folder containing the information you wish to copy Highlight the information you want using the Ctrl key to select more than one item Right click on the highlighted items and drag the mouse over the destination in your Folder List Please Note If you have Admin permissions for a Public Folder using the left mouse button instead of the right will move the information instead of copying it thereby removing it from the public file To Copy a Public or Private Folder 1 2 3 4 5 Right click on the Outlook folder in the Folder List and select Copy folder name The Copy Folder screen will appear Select the destination fol
155. cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by pat ents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 354 this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those coun tries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Library General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of fol lowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation Ifthe Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
156. capes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following condi tions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at pro gram startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word crypt
157. ce code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all mod ules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating sys tem on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a desig nated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly pro vided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it Howe
158. certificate in a different directory SSL Certificate Although a security certificate is automatically generated the first time you power up your Nitix powered server you can overwrite this certificate at any time with a 3rd party certifi cate purchased from a Certificate Authority Please Note You can only use X 509 based certificates Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 162 Web Services Replace with 3rd Party Certificate 1 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP Enable WWW server SNo 9D Enable secure WWW server Enable MySQL Server Enable users personal home pages Tr Choose a team to act as webmaster webmaster Web Proxy port 0 to let Nitix HW choose Megabytes of WWW cache 0 to disable Enable content filtering 9 VIRTUAL DOMAINS SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 163 Web Services 2 Click on the SSL Certificate button The SSL Certificate screen displays MIIC2DCCAkGgAwIBAgIEYSKAYzaNBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUF ADB7MOQwwCgYDVOQOQGEWNk c2 YxDDAKBGNVBAgTA3NmzDENMASGA1UEBXMECZ ZkczEMMAOGA1UEChMDc2 ZzMQuw CgYDVQOLEwNzZmQxHTAbBgNVBAMTFHdhbrmtlcis53ZWF2ZXJuZXQubnVsMRMwEQYK CZImiZPyLGQBGRMDc2 ZkMB4XDTAzMTEyNjE1MjExMFOXDTEzMTEyMzE1MjExMFow ezEMMAoGA1UEBhMDZHNmMQwwCgYDVOOIEwNzZmQOxDTALBGgNVBAcTBHNmZHMxDDAK BgNVBAoTA3NmczEMMAoGA1UECxMDC2 ZK
159. cial exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distrib uted in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a sin gle library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this
160. combination of Internet con nections supported by Nitix There is no single place to configure DoubleVision Instead it is automatically configured when more than one Internet connection is used at the same time Please Note In order for DoubleVision to activate you must have at least two gateway connections You can choose a default connection Advantages to DoubleVision e Increased performance Internet traffic is increased by being able to utilize the bandwidth of both lines Please Note You cannot specify which connection is used It is automatically chosen by Netintelli gence Increased reliability If one ISP s Internet connections fails the remaining ISP s connection stays functional This means that your downtime 1s limited it s also known as fail over or redundant connectivity Last Resort dial up mode If one or more of your high speed Internet connections fail Nitix can dial your modem auto matically and use dial up access instead When your high speed links are restored the modem automatically disconnects after it verifies that the high speed connections are stable and active The same applies to high speed connections if you choose to use them as a last resort connection Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 65 DoubleVision Dynamic DNS Integration If you re using Dynamic DNS Nitix automatically publishes appropriate DNS names so that people can always find your web site even if your high s
161. computer to access resources on a Microsoft network Show icon in taskbar when connected Close Cancel If Internet Protocol TCP IP is not in the This connection uses the following items list click on Install 5 The Select Network Component Type displays Select Network Component Type ER 1 E Click the type of network component you want to install Description A protocol is a language your computer uses to communicate with other computers teen Select Protocol from the window Click on Ada Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 31 Connecting to WebConfig 6 The Select Protocol window displays ES Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK If you have an installation disk for this component click Have Disk Network Protocol AppleTalk Protocol DLC Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP NetBEUI Protocol Network Monitor Driver N wLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol Have Disk ome Select Internet Protocol TCP IP from the list Click OK TCP IP should now display on the Local Area Connection Properties window Local Area Connection Properties 3 x General Connect using EF 3Com 30918 Integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C905B Configure Components checked are used by this connection amp Client for Microsoft Networks a File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protoc
162. conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice and this entire permission notice in its entirety including the disclaimer of warranties 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 363 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 364 eE LILO License LInux LOader LILO program code documentation and auxiliary programs are Copyright Werner Almesberger Copyright John Coffman All rights reserved License Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the names of the author s nor the names of other contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
163. consults the root DNS server on the Internet and through a series of queries is eventually pointed to the DNS server that stores the names and IP num bers of the hosts in example com DNS Resolution It is vital that your DNS server which maintains information about your domain is set up correctly DNS resolution service can be provided by Nitix or it can be provided by another DNS server maintained by you or by your ISP If DNS resolution is provided by your ISP and you want Nitix to receive all emails for your domain then make sure that you request the following from your ISP MX records for your domain should be pointed to your Nitix powered server outside IP address the address assigned to the ethl interface If DNS resolution is provided by Nitix make sure that the outside IP address is registered with Network Solutions as your domain DNS host Please Note In order for your Nitix powered server to function properly as a mail server for global email delivery you must have a static IP address or use Dynamic DNS Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 128 Email Services Configuring Nitix as a DNS Server 1 Selecting Local from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Local Network Options screen displays LOCAL NETWORK OPTIONS Enable rsync Server or To Actas public DNS Server ONo Iul c 4 Run DHCP serveron PEE m Dur Enable SNMP Server read only SNMP
164. ction to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of deriva tive or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the comple
165. d by or claims asserted against Apple or such Contributor by reason of any such Additional Terms 7 Versions of the License Apple may publish revised and or new versions of this License from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once Origi nal Code has been published under a particular version of this License You may continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such Original Code under the terms of any subsequent version of this License published by Apple No one other than Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 310 Apple has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License 8 NO WARRANTY OR SUPPORT The Covered Code may contain in whole or in part pre release untested or not fully tested works The Covered Code may contain errors that could cause failures or loss of data and may be incomplete or contain inaccuracies You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Covered Code or any portion thereof is at Your sole and entire risk THE COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WAR RANTY UPGRADES OR SUPPORT OF ANY KIND AND APPLE AND APPLE S LICENSOR S COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS APPLE FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 8 AND 9 AND ALL CONTRIBUTORS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS OF MER CHANTABILITY OF SATISFACTOR
166. d for the Domain Controller This will be used to add workstations to the domain Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly 11 If appropriate enable the NFS File Server If NFS file services are not enabled UNIX users will not have access to their personal network directories or shared team directories from UNIX workstations 12 Click on the Save Changes button 13 To ensure that the status of the file server has changed select System Status from the menu on the left hand side of the screen The Windows Apple and NFS File Server sec tions of the System Status screen display the updated status Please Note It may take up to 15 seconds for file services to start and during that time the status may read Error starting service Access Control Lists An Access Control List ACL is a set of data that informs a computer s operating system which permissions or access rights that each user or team has to a specific file or directory Administrators can modify a Nitix user or team s permissions Read Only Read Write or None on directories through the Nitix Permissions feature Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 90 File Services Setting a User s Permissions 1 Select File under Server Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays FILE SERVER SETUP Enable File Virus Scanner Enable Macintosh file server Enable Windows file server
167. d of data transfer through the DSL PPPoE or dial up Internet con nection measured in kbps The bar graph displays the speed as a percentage of the maximum measured speed Displays the amount of data being transferred to and from the hard disk measured in kbps or Mbps The bar graph displays the amount as a percentage of the highest amount recorded since the last power up Shows how full your server hard disk is by displaying the usage and capacity of the drive Displays System Status resource information in a graphical representation on a vari able time basis e g half hour 1 month 1 year etc Also includes graphs for Physi cal Memory and Virtual Memory Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 42 Connecting to WebConfig Internet Status Firewall TunnelVision IPsec Connec tions PPTP Connec tions SoftUpdate Disk Status Backup Status Quota Status Displays the status of your Internet connection s The status light is bright green when an Internet connection is configured properly The default route used to transfer data to destinations on the Internet also displays If a modem is configured clicking on dial modem initiates a connection to the Internet The administrator can choose to terminate the connection through this screen Displays the status of the firewall enabled disabled Displays the status of all TunnelVision connections Displays the status of all IPsec connections Displays the
168. d server is unable to automatically select an IP address the console s Status box continues to read Choosing Address or if you want to change the chosen address 1 Select IP Address from the Main Menu box on the Configuration screen see above Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 23 First time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware 2 You will be prompted to enter a new IP address Enter the new IP address and press lt Enter gt 3 Confirm the new IP address by pressing lt Y gt 4 You can turn on or off the DHCP server which automatically assigns IP addresses to the workstations connected to your local network Unless you have some other server pro viding DHCP services it is recommended that you turn DHCP on To turn DHCP on select DHCP server from the Main Menu on the Configuration Screen if it says The DHCP server is currently DISABLED then press lt Y gt to enable the DHCP server The DHCP server is now on Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 24 Chapter 3 Connecting to WebConfig What is WebConfig Although some basic system configuration can be done through the front control panel the web based configuration system WebConfig is where you will set most Nitix options Secure WebConfig Since Nitix version 3 70 Nitix s WebConfig uses 128 bit encryption protecting administra tor information and passwords Most recent versions of web browsers contain built in sup port for this you may n
169. d under this License 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes PHP freely available from lt http www php net gt THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PHPDE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 383 VELOPMENT TEAM OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI RECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER WISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the PHP Group The PHP Group can be contacted via Email at group php net For more information on the PHP Group and the PHP project please see lt http www php net gt This product includes the Zend Engine freely available at lt http www zend com gt Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 384 Appendix AB Rick R Kaseguma License Copyright ORick R Kaseguma
170. d with the Nitix server operating system Exchangelt is a cost effective alternative to the webmail scheduling task and contact sharing features provided by Microsoft Exchange Server Exchangelt works seamlessly with Microsoft Outlook to help you cre ate organize and share information quickly and easily When you use the Microsoft Outlook mail client with Exchangelt several features are added to its functionality Schedule Management Create track manage and share calendars Meeting Invitation Invite users to meetings when they accept the event appears in their calendar View the free busy times for meeting invitees and resources when sched uling a meeting Team Tasks Calendars Contacts Create track and manage team projects with per sonal calendars and contact lists Remote Mail Access your email and contacts from any computer connected to the Internet Access and Folder Permissions Give other users permission to view edit or change calendar contact list and task list information Please Note For more information on how to use Outlook with Exchangelt please refer to the Net Inte gration Technologies Exchangelt Usage Guide Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 277 Exchangelt Server Configuration Exchangelt Server Configuration Enabling Exchangelt Exchangelt server software comes fully integrated and pre installed on Nitix operating sys tem versions 3 72 or higher In order to utilize Exchan
171. d with the setup when an IP address appears on the display panel In the event that the Net Integrator Server is unable to detect an appropriate IP address for your LAN you will have to manually set the IP address for the server Refer to Manually Setting the IP Address for more information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 19 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Manually Setting the IP Address Mark I and Mark IT Please Note For manually setting the IP address on the Micro please refer to Chapter 2 First Time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware Follow these steps if your Net Integrator is unable to automatically select an IP address the display continues to read Choosing Address or if you want to change the chosen address 1 Press the Enter button on control panel The following menu displays MENU Net Info Dialer System Net is already selected Press the Enter button The following menu displays NETWORK IPAddr Netmask DHCP IPAddr is already selected Press the Enter button The current IP address 192 168 0 1 for example displays If Net Integrator was unable to select an IP address 0 0 0 0 displays Use the Left and Right direction arrows to move the cursor from digit to digit Use the Up and Down direction arrows to increase or decrease a digit s value Press the Enter button The new IP address is saved Navigate to Netmask using the direction arrows Press Enter The default Netmask dis p
172. der from the list Click the OK button The folder will appear as a sub folder of the destination folder Please Note Permissions are not transferred when a folder is copied due to the manner in which Outlook performs Copy and Move operations To Move a Public Folder 1 2 3 4 5 Right click on the Outlook folder in the Folder List and select Move folder name The Move Folder window will appear Select the destination folder from the list Click the OK button The folder will appear as a sub folder of the destination folder and the original folder will be deleted from the public folders Please Note You can only move a folder if you have Read Write Admin access to the folder Please Note Permissions are not transferred when a folder is moved due to the manner in which Out look performs Copy and Move operations Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 296 Appendix A Licensing Nitix uses a number of software programs that are licensed under various open source licenses We would like to thank all of the contributors to these projects and to acknowledge those licenses here Adrian Sun License Apple Public Source License v 2 Apache Software License v 1 1 Artistic License Australian National University Netatalk mDNSResponder section 2 3 Apache HTTP Server This software includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation CGI SpeedyCGI Compress Zlib DBD mysql DBI Diges
173. difications Larger Works technology or products that You may develop produce market or distribute 13 4 Waiver Construction Failure by Apple or any Contributor to enforce any provision of this License will not be deemed a waiver of future enforcement of that or any other provision Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter will not apply to this License 13 5 Severability a If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision of the License will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the economic benefits and intent of the parties and the remainder of this License will continue in full force and effect b Not withstanding the foregoing if applicable law prohibits or restricts You from fully and or spe cifically complying with Sections 2 and or 3 or prevents the enforceability of either of those Sections this License will immediately terminate and You must immediately discontinue any use of the Covered Code and destroy all copies of it that are in your possession or con trol Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 313 13 6 Dispute Resolution Any litigation or other dispute resolution between You and Apple relating to this License shall take place in the Northern District of California and You and Apple hereby consent to the personal jurisdiction of and
174. distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written per mission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIA BILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 395 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 396 Appendix AH University of Chicago License This software includes contributions that are Copyright O University of Chicago All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribu
175. dress Indicate whether or not you want to enable the connection Select Yes if you want to establish a permanent connection Select No if you do not want to establish a connection Select Only as a last resort if you want to use this connection only if the primary connection fails Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 61 Configuring Nitix Configuring a Leased Line Connection 1 Select Dial up from the Network Status menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Dial up Networking Setup screen displays 2 Click on the Leased Line Action button The following screen displays Leased Line PPP Options Type of connection PPP over X 21 or v 35 often used on a leased Internet Account Username CBUECTg Account Password Re enter Password e SAVE CHANGES o CANCEL CHANGES 3 Enter the account username provided by your ISP 4 Enter the account password provided by your ISP 5 Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly If the passwords do not match you will be asked to re enter your password in both fields 6 Indicate whether or not you want to enable this connection Select Yes if you want to establish a permanent connection using the leased line This is the recommended setting Select No if you do not want to establish a connection using the leased line Select Only as a last resort if you want to use the leased line connection o
176. ds that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Pro gram means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification
177. e 3 Enter a Default Medium Quota Value 4 Enter a Default Large Quota Value 5 Click on the Save Changes button to save the default quota values Please Note The maximum size that a Disk Quota value can be is 2 TB Setting Individual User Disk Quotas To define a user s Disk Quota 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main User Setup screen displays TEAM SETUP EET Members PPTP Dial In FTP ADMIN SETUP User ID PPTP Dial In FTP Exchangelt Emails Disk Space Used USER SETUP ADD NEW USER ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 98 Disk Quotas 2 Click on the appropriate user s Edit action button The Modify User screen displays MODIFY USER Ful Nome Password Test E Mail CONVERT TO TEAM s E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 In the Quota Value section select a quota value from the drop down list for that user Your options are No Quota no limit set for this user Small uses the similarly named value from the Quota Setup page Medium uses the similarly named value from the Quota Setup page Large uses the similarly named value from the Quota Setup page Specified when selected a text field opens that allows the user to specify the quota in MB Please Note The maximum size that a Disk Quota value can be is 2 TB 4 Click on the Save Changes button
178. e 337 H hard disk failure 254 installing a new hard drive 255 host names 50 hosting multiple web sites 161 I idb intelligent disk backup initiating a backup 182 idb intelligent disk backup configuration 180 idb intelligent disk backup restore initiating a restore 184 restore scenarios 183 idb Hot Swap 189 IMAP server 119 130 131 Import Users from Windows 72 installing new hard drive 255 intelligent disk backup idb 179 internet connections configuring a dial up modem 59 configuring a DSL connection 61 configuring a leased line connection 62 IP address manually setting 20 23 static and dynamic IP addresses 242 IPsec 205 L LDAP server 132 configuration of 132 leased line connection configuration of 62 Licensing 297 log messages 267 269 customizing message display 270 firewall log 225 Logon Scripts 112 M Macintosh file server 89 Mail Logging 120 Mail logging enabling 123 mail virus scanner 120 main status screen 42 Mark I 11 Mark II 11 master web server 155 Micro 11 MySQL server 257 Microsoft Access 262 phpMyAdmin 257 N network address translation NAT 199 network devices 52 reconfiguration of 53 network file system NFS 273 303 305 307 315 319 321 323 325 327 329 337 381 383 385 387 389 391 393 397 399 401 403 405 409 mounting an NFS directory 274 ugidd 273 unmounting an NFS Directory 274 network routes 54 reconfiguration of 54 network settings advanced 51
179. e Changes button This will take you directly to Nitix s main WebConfig page Please Note Some browsers will take you to an Administrator Account Created page If this occurs click on the Login button and you will be taken to the main WebConfig page Please Note Clicking on the Cancel Changes button will reset the Create Administrator Account form IMPORTANT Some Nitix services will not be enabled unless hard disks are configured through the Web Config menu For first time disk configuration do not use the Disk Install option on the Console menu For more information on configuring your hard disks see Chapter 26 Disk Management Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 38 Connecting to WebConfig Software Activation Keys The Nitix OS comes by default configured in a 30 day Trial mode To get out of Trial mode and activate the features and licenses you have purchased you must enter a Software Activa tion Key When you purchase Nitix software a Software Activation Key will be provided IMPORTANT An Internet connection is required for activating the Nitix software license It is the user s responsibility to ensure that an Internet connection is established when attempting to install the software Enter Activation Key to Exit Trial Mode Go to the WebConfig and click on Software Update on the left side Enter your Activation Key in the Nitix Registration box and then click on the Save Changes button NITIX REGISTRATION
180. e New Connection xi Type a name for the computer you are dialing Select a device B Standard 56000 bps K56Flex Modem Configure EN 3 Enter a name for the dial in connection You can leave the default or use any name that makes sense to you Click on the Next button The following screen displays Make New Connection x Type the phone number for the computer you want to call Area code Telephone number Country code Canada 1 Back Cancel 4 Enter your area code phone number and country code 5 Click on the Next button The following screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 219 Remote Access Services Make New Connection x You have successfully created a new Dial Up Networking connection called i Click Finish to save it in your Dial Up Networking folder Double click it to connect To edit this connection later click it click the File menu and then click Properties lt Back Finish Cancel 6 Click on the Finish button You have created an icon that activates a dial in connection to the internal network 7 Establish a dial in connection by double clicking on the icon that you created in the pre vious step 8 The following window displays Enter your Nitix login name and password Click on the Connect button Connect To jx m ao Dial in Connection User name fianedoe Password xxxxxxx
181. e Note If you do not select an option the Nitix OS will automatically load after 10 seconds 6 When the Nitix operating system has finished loading the following prompt will appear on your monitor Press ENTER for a shell Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 22 First time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware 7 Press lt Enter gt A Configuration screen similar to the following will appear NOTE The console displays the same information that is on the display panel of Net Integrator servers Main Menu Please Note A red warning box may appear advising you to set up your server using Nitix s web based configuration screen Press lt Enter gt to continue 8 Take note of the display s Settings and Status boxes These display various information about the server 9 Take note of the WebConfig URL shown in the Status box This is the LAN IP address of the server Please Note You will need this IP address to connect to finish the configuration of your server Please Note In the event that the server is unable to detect an appropriate IP address for your LAN you will have to manually set the IP address for the server Refer to Manually Setting the IP Address in this chapter for more information 10 You are ready to proceed with the setup see Chapter 3 Connecting to WebConfig when an IP address appears in the console s Status box Manually Setting the IP Address Follow these steps if your Nitix powere
182. e current ver sion of Nitix To view the Hardware Status list select Hardware Status from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main Hardware Status screen displays WARE US SNAP SUPPORTED kernel Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 267 Hardware Components Reporting The Type column displays the type of hardware being reported i e CPU Memory The Description column displays the brand of hardware The Device ID column displays information on where the hardware is located in your server The Status column displays whether the hardware is Supported Unsupported or Support Unknown A Supported device has its required drivers installed in the Nitix OS An Unsupported device does not have its driver installed Devices are deemed as Support Unknown when the Nitix OS cannot determine its required driver Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 268 Chapter 29 Log Messages Accessing Log Messages Nitix keeps a log that displays the messages from all of Nitix s subsystems To view the log from the firewall subsystem please refer to the Firewall Log section below To access this log 1 Select Logs Reports from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Log Messages screen displays Highlight None Priority Info v Apply E HFHIMUPJ Please Note Information messages display on a black background Warning messages display on a yellow backgr
183. e email alias of sales domain com you would enter the alias name sales 5 Inthe Target name s box enter the alias mail box es to whom an email will be for warded when it is directed to the alias name Please Note The target field can either be a mail box on the same domain for example root or an external e mail address such as user otherdomain com or a forward reference to another alias If there is more than one target they can be separated by commas or spaces A target name may not contain any other non alpha numeric characters If it does the invalid characters will be replaced by All characters will be converted to lower case if they are not already so Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 125 Email Services 6 Click on the Save Changes button The Email Aliases Notices screen displays notifying you that it is Adding alias name aliasname NOTICES Adding alias name aliasname EMAIL ALIASES om X ADD ALIAS s HOME 7 Click on the Add Alias button to add another alias or click on the Home button to return to the Email Aliases screen The new alias name displays in the list of previously created aliases Edit Delete Aliases To edit an Email Alias 1 On the Email Aliases screen click on the appropriate alias Edit Action button postmaster ADD ALIAS je HOME Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 126 Email Services 2 The
184. e fol lowing conditions are met 1 modified versions are distributed with source code and documentation and with permis sion for others to use any code and documentation whether in original or modified versions as granted under this license 2 if modified the source code documentation and user run time elements should be clearly labeled by placing an identifier of origin such as a name initial or other tag after the version number 3 users modifiers distributors and others coming into possession or using the Distribution in original or modified form accept the entire risk as to the possession use and performance of the Distribution 4 this copyright management information software identifier and version number copy right notice and license shall be retained in all versions of the Distribution 5 the University of Washington may make modifications to the Distribution that are sub stantially similar to modified versions of the Distribution and may make use sell copy dis Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 403 tribute publicly display and perform such modifications including making such modifications available under this or other licenses without obligation or restriction 6 modifications incorporating code libraries and or documentation subject to any other open source license may be made and the resulting work may be distributed under the terms of such open source license if required by that
185. e generous contributions to the wide range of soft ware distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by pat ents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those coun tries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of fol lowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not s
186. e in accordance Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 312 with its terms and termination of this License will be without prejudice to any other right or remedy of any party 13 Miscellaneous 13 1 Government End Users The Covered Code is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 Government software and technical data rights in the Covered Code include only those rights customarily provided to the public as defined in this License This customary commercial license in technical data and software is provided in accordance with FAR 12 211 Technical Data and 12 212 Computer Software and for Department of Defense purchases DFAR 252 227 7015 Technical Data Commercial Items and 227 7202 3 Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation Accord ingly all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 13 2 Relationship of Parties This License will not be construed as creating an agency part nership joint venture or any other form of legal association between or among You Apple or any Contributor and You will not represent to the contrary whether expressly by implica tion appearance or otherwise 13 3 Independent Development Nothing in this License will impair Apple s right to acquire license develop have others develop for it market and or distribute technology or products that perform the same or similar functions as or otherwise compete with Mo
187. e it is used and rebuild when a new disk is added or when the power is turned off suddenly Always click on the Shutdown button on the bottom of the System Status screen before turning off your Nitix powered server failure to do so means that your RAID array will need to rebuild when you turn the box back on Although this process does not noticeably affect the performance of Nitix it can take up to two hours to complete Apple File Server NFS File Server IMAP Mail Server POP Mail Server AP Directory Server Reboot Shutdown 4 Your disk array is working correctly This message displays after a RAID array is finished building No disks detected Are your drives inserted or locked This message displays when your drives are not fully inserted and properly locked or when all available drives have crashed If your drives are not locked insert the hard disk key into the lock and turn it clockwise until it snaps back into the locked position If your disks have crashed refer to Recovering from Disk Failure 1n this chapter for informa tion on how to replace failed disks The RAID array is in degraded mode If you remove a disk you will lose access to your files This message displays 1f you have only one of the available drives configured in a RAID array You can create a proper RAID array by configuring a second disk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 252 Disk Management
188. e on Nitix 1 Select Dial up from the Networking Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Dial up Networking Setup screen displays DIAL UP NETWORKING SETUP P on eth P er Ethernet or P P on eth 13 er Ethernet or PPTP often use PTP on eth2 P er Ethernet or PPTP often use Dial up PPP DETECT MODEMS 2 Click on the appropriate modem s Action button 3 A second Dial up Networking Setup screen displays DIAL UP NETWORKING SETUP Account Password Re enter Password DVANCED OPTIONS Dial automatically when someone tries to reach the internet Emulate Windows Dial up Networking Allow Dial In connections SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 217 Remote Access Services 4 Inthe Allow Dial in connections section select Yes 5 Click on the Save Changes button Configuring Dial in Service in Windows 1 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel Double click on the Add Remove programs icon 2 The Add Remove Programs Properties screen displays Select the Windows Setup tab 3 Select Communications from the Components list and click on the Details button A second Components list displays showing the communications components that are already installed and those that can be installed 4 Select Dial Up Networking from the Components list e Ifit already has a check then dial in software has already been
189. e software or modify the Zend Engine or any portion thereof your use of the separated or modified Zend Engine software shall not be governed by this license and instead shall be governed by the license set forth at http www zend com license ZendLicense THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTER RUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the PHP Group The PHP Group can be contacted via Email at group php net For more information on the PHP Group and the PHP project please see lt http www php net gt Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 382 Appendix AA The PHP License version 3 0 Copyright 1999 2002 The PHP Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source
190. e subdirectory WWW is created in the Webmaster network drive This is the directory from which Intranet files are served Any files saved in this directory are automatically accessible through the master web site The Webmaster directory also contains a log subdirectory where server access and error logs are maintained and a cgi bin directory where all CGI scripts are stored Configuring your Master Web Server 1 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP Enable WWW server Enable secure WWW server Enable MySQL Server Enable users personal home Choose a team to act as webmaster Web Proxy port gt 0 to let Nitix HW choose Megabytes of WWW cache um E uum VIRTUAL DOMAINS SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T 2 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the WWW server Selecting Yes enables the server and allows users on the internal network and users on the Internet to access web pages on this server If enabled the WWW server will serve pages out of the webmaster s WWW directory In addition WWW server logs are written in the webmaster s directory Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 156 Web Services Selecting Only Trusted Hosts enables the server and allows users on the internal network to access web pages on this server If enabled the WWW server will serve pages o
191. e when the user is created Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 111 NT Domain Services For Teams 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen Click on the Edit Action button for the appropriate user The Modify Team screen displays MODIFY TEAM Team Ins I Web Server Admin Password Re enter Password Allow FTP ccess Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Group Email CONVERT TO USER E MAIL 2 From the drop down menu in the Automatically mount files as field select the drive that the team s shared files should be mounted as on the workstation The default None is to not mount the files at all This ensures that there will be no conflict between use of drive space 3 Click on the Save Changes button This can also be done when the team is created Logon Scripts Logon scripts are supported through DOS batch files found at Servername netlogon All scripts are called username bat These batch files will call upon logon bat If manual modifications are required create a file called logon bat All manual modifications should be made to logon bat as username bat is automatically generated and modifications will be lost Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 112 NT Domain Services Please Note In order to prevent conflicts if you upgrade to Nitix version 3 75 or higher from a previous version your logon bat file will be automatically renamed
192. eam Management User Accounts Creating Users 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main Setup screen displays TEAM SETU ADMIN SETUP Teams PPTP Dial In FIP Exchangelt Emails Disk Space Used Action 8 IB C USER SETUP User D _ ADD NEW USER _ ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 69 User amp Team Management 2 Click on the Add New User button The Add a User screen displays ADD A USER Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Allocate Exchangeli License SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 Enter the User ID that will serve as the user s login and personal directory name User IDs cannot contain spaces or any punctuation other than the hyphen the dot or the under score e g jane doe jane doe janedoe Please Note If Nitixs email server is used to receive email this user ID will become part of the user s email address For example if the username janedoe is created on a Nitix powered server that resides in the example com domain Jane s email address willbe janedoe example com 4 Enter the user s full name 5 Enter a password for the user User passwords should be unique 6 Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly If the passwords do not match you will be asked to re enter the password in both fields 7 Indicate whether or not this user will have administrative p
193. ectly with the master server and the master s local network Your server will not be able to see any of the other VPN con nected servers or networks Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 201 Tunnel Vision Please Note In previous versions of the Nitix software fully meshed mode was always enabled and this is still the recommended setting 5 Leave the Address of Master Server field empty since the Master server does not initiate connections 6 Enter a password that the server and client will use to prove to each other that they are trusted 7 Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly 8 Click on the Save Changes button Configuring a TunnelVision Client A Nitix powered server doesn t need a static IP address to act as a Tunnel Vision client but it needs to know the static IP address of the master server To find this information select Local from the Network Settings menu on the master server On the screen that displays click on the Advanced button Then look at the address assigned to eth 1 Select VPN from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The VPN Setup screen displays Tunnel Vision Use Fully Meshed Mode Qyes No Re enter Tunnel Vision Password 2 Leave the default Enable PPTP Server setting 3 Select Yes in the Enable Tunnel Vision section of the screen 4 Inthe Tunnel Vision Use Fully Meshed Mode box select Yes if you are running Tunnel Visi
194. ecutable of yours by linking this shall be construed as a mere form of aggregation provided that the complete Standard Version of the interpreter is so embedded 6 The scripts and library files supplied as input to or produced as output from the programs of this Package do not automatically fall under the copyright of this Package but belong to whoever generated them and may be sold commercially and may be aggregated with this Package If such scripts or library files are aggregated with this Package via the so called undump or unexec methods of producing a binary executable image then distribution of such an image shall neither be construed as a distribution of this Package nor shall it fall under the restrictions of Paragraphs 3 and 4 provided that you do not represent such an exe cutable image as a Standard Version of this Package 7 C subroutines or comparably compiled subroutines in other languages supplied by you and linked into this Package in order to emulate subroutines and variables of the language defined by this Package shall not be considered part of this Package but are the equivalent of input as in Paragraph 6 provided these subroutines do not change the language in any way that would cause it to fail the regression tests for the language 8 Aggregation of this Package with a commercial distribution is always permitted provided that the use of this Package is embedded that is when no overt attempt is made to make t
195. ed officer of NVIDIA Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 373 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 374 Appendix W OpenLDAP Public License Version 2 7 7 September 2001 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation Software with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution and 3 Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time Each revision is dis tinguished by a version number You may use this Software under terms of this license revi sion or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CON TRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS CLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION ITS CONTRIBU TORS OR THE AUTHOR S OR OWNER S OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM
196. edistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum stance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of pro tecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of soft ware distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it 1s up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by pat ents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so t
197. ee library If the library is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Pub lic License which was designed for utility programs This license the GNU Library General Public License applies to certain designated libraries This license is quite different from the ordinary one be sure to read it in full and don t assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinc tion we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it Link ing a program with a library without changing the library is in some sense simply using the library and is analogous to running a utility program or application program However in a textual and legal sense the linked executable is a combined work a derivative of the orig
198. eed to know much about RAID in order to configure it on your Nitix powered server Intelligent Disk Backup idb is a system that automatically performs backup procedures as often as every fifteen minutes without input from a system administrator See Intelligent Disk Backup idb in Chapter 17 Backup amp Restore for more information If your Nitix powered server has one disk then you cannot take advantage of idb or RAID If your Nitix powered server has exactly two disks you can have idb backup or a two disk RAID array but not both If you have three or more disks you can have a two or more disk RAID array and idb backup or a RAID array with all available disks and no idb backup Configuring your disks 1 The Disk Status section of the main Services Status Snapshot screen in WebConfig has a link telling you that disk s have not been configured Your 3 disks are not configured Disk Status A z You can configure them or with Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 249 Disk Management 2 Click on the appropriate link to configure your disks For example if you have three disks the Disk Status section will say Your 3 disks are not configured You can config ure them all in a RAID or with disk 3 as an idb backup disk For a RAID configuration you would click on the all in a RAID link if you want to enable idb backup you would click on disk 3 as an idb backup disk Please Note If you select a R
199. eed to upgrade your browser prior to installing Nitix version 3 70 or later on your server Netscape 7 http channels netscape com ns browsers download jsp Netscape older versions http wp netscape com download archive html Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 http www microsoft com windows ie default asp Mozilla 1 0 1 http www mozilla org releases stable html Opera 6 05 http www opera com download If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 5 or 5 01 but don t want to upgrade you can download 128 bit encryption separately http www microsoft com windows ie downloads recommended 128bit default asp Failure to support 128 bit encryption will result in WebConfig being unreachable while the server is running Nitix version 3 70 or later Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 25 Connecting to WebConfig Configuring TCP IP Before you can access WebConfig you have to configure your workstation to use TCP IP If TCP IP is already configured proceed to Creating an Administrator Account later in this chapter If TCP IP is not configured follow the appropriate steps for your operating system For Windows 95 98 ME 1 In Windows select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The Control Panel window dis plays amp Control Panel BEF Eile Edit View Go Favorites Help 73 a e C X ESTEE Address ca Control Panel gt 6 Accessibility Options e Printers 7 E
200. el Please Note We recommend that you use an IMAP email server However Exchangelt will work with POP3 email servers Click Next Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 285 Exchangelt 9 Enter your User Information Server Information and Logon Information zixl Internet E mail Settings IMAP gt Each of these settings is required to get your e mail account working E User Information Server Information Your Name lanyuser Incoming mail server IMAP server domain com E mail Address anyuser domain com Outgoing mail server SMTP fserver domain com Logon Information User Name anyuser Password I IV Remember password B Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA More Settings Back Cancel Please Note Ensure that the Log on Secure Password Authentication SPA is not checked 10 Click the Next button 11 Click the Finish button 12 The User Name screen appears Enter your Name and Initials Click the OK button Please Note The User Name screen only appears if it your first time using Outlook Directory Services Setup 1 From Outlook select Tools gt Email Accounts 2 The Email Accounts screen appears xd E mail Accounts EZ You can change the e mail accounts and directories that Outlook uses E mail Add a new e mail account C view or change existing e mail accounts Directory Add anew directory or address book View or change existing directori
201. elease Notes link to access its release notes Please Note The release notes outline the version s new features and provide important informa tion that you need to know before upgrading your software Please read the release notes carefully 5 The new software has to be downloaded to your server To do so click on the appropriate version s Download link The System Status screen displays The SoftUpdate line dis plays the progress of the download SERVICES STATUS SNAPSHOT eee EN p VPN Tunnels Not Enabled 6 When the download is complete the SoftUpdate line will tell you that a software update has been installed and prompt you to reboot your system 7 Click on the Reboot link The following screen displays Rebooting Your server is rebooting Please wait a few minutes then click below to return to the main screen Return 8 Click on the Return button when an IP address appears on your Nitix powered server s display panel console The System Status screen displays The SoftUpdate line asks if you want to keep the new software release Selecting Yes permanently installs the new operating system Selecting No reboots your Nitix powered server and reverts to the previous oper ating system Please Note If the newer version of the Nitix operating system is not installed properly the server uses the old version when it reboots If the server encounters any difficulty starting the new operating System
202. ely depends on how your IP address is configured Static and Dynamic IP Addresses A person trying to access FastForward services through your Nitix powered server must know your assigned IP address in order to locate you on the Internet Each time you connect to the Internet your ISP assigns you a IP address Dynamic IP addresses are inconvenient for use with FastForward because your address changes each time you connect making it diffi cult for your clients to find you If you specifically ask for one your ISP can give you a static IP address which never changes Once you have a working static IP address you can add it to a DNS server which will convert your domain s readable name into its IP address Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 242 FastForward Configuring FastForward You can configure FastForward once you know your source and destination addresses If you still aren t sure where the addresses come from keep reading we have a few examples a bit later on IMPORTANT Remember that you decrease firewall security when you enable FastForward 1 Login to Nitix with your administrator username and password WebConfig s System Status page displays 2 Select Fast Forward from the Network Setup menu The Fast Forward screen displays showing the list of addresses being forwarded Please Note This list may be empty if no addresses are being forwarded FAST FORWARD From Port To Port ADD NEW FORWA
203. ending on the available Internet bandwidth The POP Retriever improves the speed considerably because it pre retrieves emails e Mail Forwarding Nitix can automatically forward mail that has been received from a remote mail account to a user s local mailbox e Auto Reply Nitix can automatically send a reply message to every email received by a user Please Note To modify user s advanced email settings refer to Modifying User Email Settings in Chapter 7 User amp Team Management LDAP Server Nitix has a built in Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server which provides a directory of user names and email addresses It is automatically populated with names and email addresses of all Nitix users Most email clients support access to read only LDAP serv ers Configuring LDAP in Microsoft Outlook 1 Open Microsoft Outlook From the main menu select Tools gt Accounts The Internet Accounts screen displays Internet Accounts ix All Mail News Directory Service Mail News Connection e Hemove Directory Service Set Order Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 132 Email Services 2 Select Add gt Directory Service The Internet Connection Wizard displays Internet Connection Wizard Internet Directory Server Name 3 In the Internet directory LDAP server field enter the name or IP address of your Nitix powered server 4 Click on the Next button T
204. ense 401 University of Washington s Free Fork License 403 VPB Software License 405 Zend Engine License version 2 00 407 Zlib License 409 Glossary 411 Chapter 1 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Net Integrator Components You should have received the following components in your Net Integrator package Mark I and Mark II Net Integrator Server 1 Net Integrator User Manual CD 1 and Quick Start Guide 1 Hard disk keys 2 and Face Plate Keys 2 Power supply cord 1 Category 5 Ethernet cables 3 a fF N Micro 1 Net Integrator Server 1 Net Integrator User Manual CD 1 and Quick Start Guide 1 Power cord and external supply cord Category 5 Ethernet cables 3 Po N Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 11 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Meet Your Net Integrator Mark I and Mark II Front View ORAON Please Note This image corresponds to our Mark I and Mark II models System Failure LED lights up when there is a failure on the system Ethernet 0 Activity LED indicates activity on the Ethernet 0 interface Ethernet 1 Activity LED indicates activity on the Ethernet interface Ethernet 2 Activity LED indicates activity on the Ethernet 2 interface Boot Activity LED lights up while the software is booting o m fF Y N Power LED lights up when power is on Power button used to turn the box on and off 8 Removable hard disk tra
205. enu on the left side of the WebConfig screen 3 In the User Setup box scroll down to the user to whom you wish to grant an Exchangelt license 4 Click on the Edit button circle with three dots under the Action column for that user Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 280 Exchangelt 5 Inthe Modify User screen scroll down to Allocate Exchangelt License and select the Yes button MODIFY USER Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Allocate Exchangelt License Automatically mount files as Quota Value a CONVERT TO TEAM je E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 6 Click on Save Changes at the bottom of the screen 7 Repeat this process for every user to whom you want to grant an Exchangelt license Outlook Configuration Please Note In order to use Exchangelt you must have a user account on Nitix Software Requirements Exchangelt requires Microsoft Outlook 2000 Microsoft Outlook 2002 or Microsoft Outlook 2003 running on a Windows 2000 or Windows XP platform Configuring Microsoft Outlook 2000 Please Note You need to have Microsoft s Web Publishing Wizard installed in order for the free busy services to work with Outlook 2000 on Windows 2000 If this has not already been installed on your com puter you can download the installation file from http www microsoft com downloads release asp ReleaselD 22658 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 281 Exchangelt Confi
206. equests an updated list of available software releases A list of avail able software releases is found on the Software Update screen Upgrading Nitix IMPORTANT If you are running Nitix from a CD ROM you must configure your disks from the WebConfig menu shut down the system remove the Nitix CD and restart the system before SoftUpdate will work For more information on configuring your hard disks see Chapter 26 Disk Management It is best to upgrade your software after hours because rebooting disconnects all users and causes all services to stop functioning until the server has restarted Please Note If you are running Nitix version 3 74 or higher and you download or select another software version a Release Notes screen will appear You must click on the Continue with Download link at the bottom of the page in order to continue If you are upgrading from a pre 3 74 version to 3 74 or higher the Release Notes screen will not appear 1 Select Software Update from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Software Update screen displays showing the Nitix software version your server is cur rently running and all versions available for download Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 19 Software Update N Click on the Check Versions button to update the list of available versions e The System status screen will appear The SoftUpdate line displays the progress of the download 4 Click on a version s R
207. er nal time servers obtaining server time stamps and using them to adjust the client s clock Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 415 Packet Packet Filter Peer to Peer Network PhpMyAdmin PING POP3 Port Number PPP PPPoE A unit of data transmitted over a network Large chunks of information are broken up into pack ets before they are sent across the Internet A filter that blocks traffic based on a specific IP address or type of application email FTP web etc which is specified by port number A network where there is no dedicated server Computers with access privileges can share files and peripherals with all other computers on the network PHP MySQL Administration A program used to administer MySQL databases and provides a user interface Packet InterNet Groper A program used to determine if a server is functional It sends small packets to the server which replies with similar packets Post Office Protocol 3 A popular protocol used most often by ISPs for receiving email messages POP3 servers allow access to a single Inbox as opposed to IMAP servers which provide access to multiple server side folders A number assigned to an application program running on a computer in a TCP IP based network such as the Internet The number is used to link the incoming data to the correct service There are several standard port numbers For example port 80 is used for web traffic Point to Point Pr
208. eral all Internet hosts owned by your company will belong under the same domain 4 Indicate whether or not you want the rsync server to be enabled This options is for Unix style clients only We recommend that you leave the default setting 5 Select the appropriate public DNS resolution option Select Yes if you want Nitix to perform DNS resolution for Internet hosts Select No if you do not want Nitix to perform DNS resolution Select Dynamic if you want Nitix to perform Dynamic DNS resolution Please Note If the public DNS server is enabled Internet hosts can resolve name to IP number queries for Internet services provided by Nitix Dynamic DNS resolution allows you to host email web and FTP services using an Internet connection with a dynamic IP address 6 The DHCP server is set by default to turned off on eth0 if no other DHCP server is on that segment We recommend that you turn this on 7 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol server Please Note SNMP is used to collect statistical information from the host about parameters such as network throughput and CPU utilization It is also used for network monitoring 8 If you enable the SNMP server enter an appropriate SNMP community name 9 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the NIS Server Leave NIS disabled if you are using Windows If you are using Unix or a similar system leave it disabled unless you
209. ertificate Request box CUSTOMIZE PKCS 10 CERTIFICATE REQUEST State Or Province E Common Name IET I ouremail domain com ENECISEbeeeso c O o GENERATE REQUEST 4 Click on the Generate Request button A Security Alert window will appear Click Yes to proceed 5 The Notices box at the top of the screen will show that Nitix is generating a new certifi cate request based on the information you provided above and NOTICES a new certificate request will be generated in the PKCS 10 Certificate Request box PKCS 10 CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIBzTCCATYCAQAwgYwxCzAJBgNVBAYTAlVTMRIvEAYDVOOIEwlBbnkgU3RhdGUx ETAPBgNVBACTCEFueSBUb3duMRQwEgYDVOOKEutBOkMgQ2 9t cGFue TEAMBgGA1UE AxMRYWJjLndlYXZlcm51dC5udUwxJDAiBgoJkiaJk ISsZAEZFhRSb3VyZU1haUxA ZG9tYUluLmNvbTCBnzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEAwcrKg61YeYaqHg Ua8YatfgzRZdgIpRSDYK3todg6q i3WFsnvLjZzcqmspYquBmziKiSGlKKlnsXfqkb9 80vmoO61gU2NoO0c4Uc9S9ccfsTT jKD10jceWUdtJRCDSH2 Z12FCKOTOPtPfYCbK4Z K600EeBqoZ vHf jJXIM Zq4B8208jUpUCAwEAAaAAMAOGCSqGSID3DQEBBQUAAAGB AJPA3g5CD4Vchl7wNyuCFnesHFOIAv6Sh9h367 XahktmYhHKK6a83 0eRELYf9Ce FY3PsMCVerGCgOgLosOUARQT6n3xlaMFPXiCBNmfLadggnlI5nwHBkgiSTpaPCFSA IlnBqr4OE60Ib3stDesklinqgxPw7X173vsPcs z8JAkdBr 6 Copy and paste the new certificate request from the PKCS 10 Certificate Request box and give it to your Certificate Authority They will use this to generate a new certificate Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 165 Web Services
210. erver Setup menu A procedure initiated from the Backup Files menu allows you configure certain settings on the main Backup Setup screen To change the settings you have to go to the main Backup Setup screen Please Note This can also be done from the control panel found on the front of Net Integrator servers A backup initiated from the control panel begins a procedure with the settings that were last configured IMPORTANT A copy of your server configuration is made each time a backup is performed This configuration file can be used to restore your settings in the event of a catastrophic system failure Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 181 Backup amp Restore Initiating a Backup from the WebConfig Menu 1 Select Backup from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main Backup Setup screen displays BACKUP SETUP Enable hackup compression smaller slower Backup every Day begins at E Mail backup reports to E Mail log lev SAVE CHANGES BACKUP FILES RESTORE FILES 2 In the Backup Setup section of the screen enter the appropriate backup parameters Please Note Refer to Configuring idb in this chapter for more information on these fields 3 Click on the Save Changes button to save your selections 4 Click on the Backup Files button A screen similar to the following will displays all of the directories that can be backed up BACKUP FIL
211. erwise used sepa rately from the other parts No Rental Customer may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE to someone else 3 TERMINATION This LICENSE will automatically terminate if Customer fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions hereof In such event Customer must destroy all copies of the SOFT WARE and all of its component parts 4 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to all images photographs animations video audio music text and other information incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by NVIDIA or its suppliers The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions Accordingly Customer is required to treat the SOFT WARE like any other copyrighted material except as otherwise allowed pursuant to this LICENSE and that it may make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archive purposes 5 APPLICABLE LAW This agreement shall be deemed to have been made in and shall be construed pursuant to the laws of the State of California Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 372 6 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION ON LIABILITY 6 1 No Warranties TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND NVIDIA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
212. es Technical Support 2 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator 11 Net Integrator Components 11 Meet Your Net Integrator 12 Connecting the Power 15 Ethernet Connections 16 Connecting Ethernet Port0 16 Connecting Ethernet Ports 1 and2 17 Connecting an External Dial up Modem 18 Power up Sequence Mark I and Mark II 19 Manually Setting the IP Address Mark I and Mark I 20 First time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware 21 Minimum Server Requirements 21 Configuring Your System 22 Manually Setting the IP Address 23 Connecting to WebConfig 25 What is WebConfig 25 Secure WebConfig 25 Configuring TCP IP 26 Creating an Administrator Account 37 Software Activation Keys 39 System Status Screen 40 Notices Box 47 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter amp Configuring Nitix 49 Proceeding with Configuration 49 Configuring General Network Settings 49 Configuring Advanced Network Settings 51 Network Devices 52 Network Routes 54 Network Configuration Scenarios 56 Configuring your Internet Connection 59 Client Access Licenses 63 Client Access Licensing Requirements 63 License Information 63 DoubleVision 65 What is DoubleVision 65 Modem Connections 66 User amp Team Management 67 Service Integration 67 User Accounts 69 Modifying User Email Settings 76 Team Accounts 78 Password Policy 82 File Services 87 File Sharing Services 87 Configuring File Services 88 Access Control
213. es in the Web Mail Server Requires IMAP MySQL and secure WWW servers box 4 Click on Save Changes Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 136 WebMail 5 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP Enable WWW server Enable secure WWW server Enable MySQL Server Enable users personal home pages d Choose a team to act as webmaster Web Proxy port gt 0 to let Nitix HW choose Megabytes of WWW cache 0 to disable j amp VIRTUAL DOMAINS SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Select Yes in the Enable WWW server box Select Yes in the Enable secure WWW server box Select Yes in the Enable MySQL Server box Click on Save Changes o o Nog Accessing WebMail 1 Open a web browser from any workstation that is connected to the Internet 2 Enter the address of your Nitix powered server into the browser s address bar If Nitix provides DNS resolution for your domain enter information in the follow ing format http server domain com email For example if your server name is alpha and your domain name is example com enter http alpha example com email You can also enter information in the following format http www example com email Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 137 WebMail If Nitix does not provide DNS resolution enter your Nitix powered server s
214. es not covered in this manual Enabling WebMail Server The WWW based WebMail email server uses IMAP and a secure encrypted WWW connec tion therefore the Secure WWW Server and IMAP server must be enabled in WebConfig in order for WebMail to become available When enabled Web Mail can be reached at https yourservername com email Please Note For users to access WebMail from elsewhere on the Internet the Secure WWW Server must be set to allow connections from anywhere but the IMAP server can be set to accept connections from Only Trusted Hosts It is the WWW server on the local network that establishes the IMAP connec tion 1 To enable the server configurations for WebMail log in to WebConfig Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 135 WebMail 2 Select E Mail from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The E Mail Setup screen displays SMTP mail delivery server POP 3 mail reader server POP 3 SSL secure mail reader server IMAP advanced mail reader server IMAP SSL secure advanced mail reader server Web Mail Server Requires IMAP MySQL and secure WWW servers Exchangelt Server Requires MySQL and both WWW servers LDAP directory server Mail Virus Scanner Mail Logging y No ISP s SMTP Server ISP s SMTP Username ISP s SMTP Password E ts EMAIL ALIASES CLEAR EMAIL QUEUE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 Select Y
215. es or address books Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 286 Exchangelt 3 Under Directory choose Add a new directory or address book 4 Click the Next button 5 Select Internet Directory Service LDAP E mail Accounts 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter the Server name E mail Accounts 8 Click the Next button 9 The Add Email Account screen appears asking if it is okay to exit Outlook Click the OK button 10 Click the Finish button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 287 Exchangelt Configuring Microsoft Outlook 2003 Configuring Email If you are already using Outlook 2003 select Tools gt Accounts then click on Add gt Mail The Internet Connection Wizard screen appears Jump to Step five 5 If this is your first time using Outlook 2003 start at step one 1 1 S5 9 Or Be o dm Open Microsoft Outlook 2003 The Outlook 2003 Startup screen appears Click the Next button The Account Configuration screen appears Click the Yes button Click the Next button The Email Accounts screen appears asking you to select your email server type Select IMAP Please Note We recommend that you use an IMAP email server However Exchangelt will work with POP3 email servers Click Next Enter your User Information Server Information and Logon Information E mail Accounts Internet E mail Settings IMAP Each of these settings are required to
216. et Please Note To reset a user s permissions level to default settings click on the Reset Permissions button at the bottom of the screen This will reset all permission for all contents including sub folders of the user s directory Please Note Note You can remove a user s permissions by clicking the X button in the action column This option does not appear for the file owner or for the Everyone Else row Setting a Team s Permissions 1 Select File under Server Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays FILE SERVER SETUP Enable File Virus Scanner Enable Macintosh file server Yes l Enable Windows file server Jj Kun TEE EN LEBE yy ORKGROUP Actas Domain Member J O No 1 Domain Member amp dmin username Administrator Domain Member Admin password X Domain Member Re enter admin password m Act as Domain Controller Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles Domain Controller Admin password username is _ root Domain Controller Re enter admin password Enable NFS file server Mapping scheme for NFS PERMISSIONS SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES T Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 93 File Services 2 Click on the Permissions button at the bottom of the screen The Select Files screen dis plays i SELECT FILES Teams autoinstall exchangeitadmin log test_test webmaster
217. ewall Services 223 ICSA Firewall Security Compliance 223 Traffic Denied Inbound 223 Traffic Permitted Inbound 224 Chapter 23 Chapter 24 Chapter 25 Chapter 26 Traffic Permitted Outbound 224 Firewall Log 225 Domain Name Services 227 What is DNS 227 DNS Services 227 Configuring PublicDNS 228 How the DNS System Works 229 Dynamic DNS 230 Manually Creating DNS Entries 230 Workstation Viewer 235 What is the Workstation Viewer 235 Accessing the Workstation Viewer 235 Virtual Network Computing VNC 236 Configuring VNC 236 FastForward 239 What is FastForward 239 Introduction to TCP IP 239 Proxy Servers 241 Configuring FastForward 243 Forwarding Scenarios 245 Multiple Static IP Addresses 246 Common Port Numbers 246 Troubleshooting FastForward 247 Disk Management 249 Disk Configuration idb and RAID 249 Chapter 27 Chapter 28 Chapter 29 Chapter 30 Reconfiguring your disks 250 Disk Status Messages 252 Recovering from Disk Failure 253 Disk Recovery SystemER 254 Hard Disk Failure 254 Installing a New Hard Drive 255 MySQL Server 257 What is the MySQL Server 257 What is phpMyAdmin 257 Managing Databases in phpMyAdmin 258 Deleting Database Tables 261 Setting up Windows for MySQL Access 262 What is a Dynamic Web Site 266 Hardware Components Reporting 267 Hardware Components Reporting 267 Log Messages 269 Accessing Log Messages 269 Customizing Message Display 270 Firewall Log
218. f the same user sends you ten messages they will only receive one auto reply from your mailserver Team Accounts Creating Teams 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main User Setup screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 78 User amp Team Management 2 Click on the Add New Team button The Create New Team screen displays CREATE NEW TEAM Re enter Password Allow VPN PPTP and Dial In Access Group Email Automatically mount files as Quota Value Team Members 3 Enter a team ID This ID serves as the name of the team s shared directory and as the team s FTP login name which gives team members FTP access to the shared directory and the WWW directory Team IDs cannot contain spaces or any punctuation other than the hyphen the dot or the underscore e g sales team sales team sales team 4 Enter a descriptive name for the team in the Full Name field 5 Enter a login password for the team Team passwords should be unique 6 Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly If the passwords do not match you will be asked to re enter the password in both fields 7 Indicate whether or not the team will have FTP access to the team directory Please Note FTP has to be enabled before the team has FTP access If FTP is enabled in Trusted Hosts Only mode the team can access files from the internal network or from a VPN If FTP is ena
219. figuring your hard disks see Chapter 26 Disk Management Configuring General Network Settings 1 Select Local from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Local Network Options screen displays i LOCAL NETWORK OPTIONS Host N Enable rsy Act as public DN Run DHCP Enable SNMP Server System Time frm Adjust Time ADVANCED SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 49 Configuring Nitix 2 Nitix s NetIntelligence feature automatically assigns a random Host Name to the Nitix server during the first boot up If appropriate enter a new host name by typing over the existing text The new host name should be unique it should use only numbers and let ters and it should contain no spaces Please Note Host Names should be unique because they are used to distinguish your box from others on the local network and are used by local users to identify a Nitix s file and print sharing resources In addition the host name in conjunction with the domain name forms a unique Internet name under which the Nitix server and its web FTP and email services are addressed on the Inter net 3 If appropriate enter a new domain name by typing over the existing text Please Note Domain Names are part of the Internet naming standard which applies to every device connected to the Internet Each host has a unique name which consists of a host name and domain name In gen
220. ftware Update Sound Speech Startup Disk TCP IP Text USB Printer Sharing Web Sharing Speakable Items gt Stickies Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 34 Connecting to WebConfig The TCP IP window displays D E pP Default og Connect via Ethernet Stipe Configure Using DHCP Server DHCP Client ID IP Address 192 168 12 8 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Router address 192 168 12 1 Search domains Name server addr 192 168 12 1 2 Select Connect via Ethernet Select Connect via DHCP Leave the other fields blank 3 Click on the Close Window button The Save screen displays N Save changes to the current configuration Click on Save 4 Ifthe Internet connection doesn t function immediately reboot your computer Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 35 Connecting to WebConfig For Mac OS X 1 Click on the Apple icon in the top menu bar Select Control Panel gt System Preferences U system Prefs Edit View V About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down Log Out The System Preferences window displays SS Ere eo System Preferences c PT d I hig e Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Personal E KY EB o Desktop Dock General International Login Screen Saver Universal Access Hardware 6 m
221. g For Windows 2000 XP 1 In Windows select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel or in Windows XP Start gt Control Panel 2 Select Network and Dial up Connections from the list The Network Connections screen displays RISE Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help EI Back gt search GyFolders History Ug GE X Address du Network and Dial up Connections es Hm L1 gom Network and Dial Connection up Connections Local Area Connection Type LAN Connection Status Enabled 3Com 3C918 Integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C905B TX Compatible 3Com 3C918 Integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C905B TX Compatible 3 Click on Local Area Connection The Local Area Connection window displays General r Connection Status Connected Duration 00 04 46 Speed 100 0 Mbps m Activity Sent am Received IE Packets 68 0 oeme Close Click on Properties Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 30 Connecting to WebConfig 4 The Local Area Connection Properties window displays Local Area Connection Properties 1 2l x General Connect using BF 3Com 3C918 Integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C905B Components checked are used by this connection Client for Microsoft Networks a File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Description Allows your
222. ge as a market that must bear the fee Freely Available means that no fee is charged for the item itself though there may be fees involved in handling the item It also means that recipients of the item may redistribute it under the same conditions they received it 1 You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of the Standard Version of this Package without restriction provided that you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and associated disclaimers Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 315 2 You may apply bug fixes portability fixes and other modifications derived from the Pub lic Domain or from the Copyright Holder A Package modified in such a way shall still be considered the Standard Version 3 You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way provided that you insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how and when you changed that file and pro vided that you do at least ONE of the following a place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise make them Freely Available such as by posting said modifications to Usenet or an equivalent medium or placing the modifications on a major archive site such as uunet uu net or by allowing the Copyright Holder to include your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package b use the modified Package only within your corporation or organization c rename any non standard executables so the names do not confl
223. gelt an Exchangelt license for the user account on Nitix is required Depending on the version of Nitix you have purchased you may receive a number of free licenses preinstalled Additional licenses can be purchased separately Please contact your Net Integration Technologies representative for details To enable Exchangelt 1 Log in to Nitix s WebConfig screen 2 Select E mail from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen 3 The Email Setup screen displays EMAIL SETUP u H ggg EMAIL ALIASES _ CLEAR EMAIL QUEUE SAVE CHANGES amp CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 278 Exchangelt 4 5 Scroll down to Exchangelt Server Requires MySQL and secure WWW servers and select Yes Click on Save Changes at the bottom of the screen Downloading Exchangelt e D v Cv Log in to WebConfig Select Software Update from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Software Update screen displays showing the software version currently running on your Nitix powered server and all versions available for download In the Notices box click on the Download link in the Exchangelt Client Access Licenses section NOTICES remaining Please Note you can also find the Download link at http www net itech com downloads exchangeit If the Security Information window displays click on the Yes button
224. gets restored into a new subdirectory called Restore which is created in the user or team directory Users can browse through the files from the disk copy any needed files and then delete the Restore sub directory 4 Configuring Restore Restores system configuration Initiating an idb Restore A copy of your server configuration is made each time a backup is performed This configu ration file can be used to restore your settings in the event of a catastrophic system failure Initiating a Directory Restore from the WebConfig Menu 1 Select Backup from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main Backup Setup screen displays BACKUP SETUP Enable hackup compression smaller slower Backup every lt E Mail log level SAVE CHANGES T BACKUP FILES RESTORE FILES 2 Click on the Restore Files button which displays a list of backups and the date that the backup was performed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 184 Backup amp Restore RESTORE FILES Monthly backup farce Micro backup 5 Micro backup X Micro backup 5 3 To view the contents of a backup file click on the Open button The following screen showing the date and time the backup was performed and the directories that can be restored displays Please Note The first entry in the Restore Files section of the screen is for System Configuratio
225. gnated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the require ment to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 341 Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten
226. guring Email If you are already using Outlook 2000 for your email in nternet mode select Tools gt Accounts Click on Add gt Mail The Internet Connection Wizard screen appears Jump to Step five 5 If this is your first time using Outlook 2000 start at step one 1 1 Open Microsoft Outlook 2000 Please Note Corporate Mode Microsoft Outlook is not supported Please go to Tools gt Options gt Mail Delivery and click on Reconfigure Mail Support to reconfigure Outlook to Internet Only mode If you are unsure how to accomplish this please refer to your Office 2000 documentation 2 3 4 5 9 The User Name screen appears Enter your Name and Initials Click the OK button The nternet Connection Wizard screen appears Enter your Display name this is the name that will appear on your outgoing email Click the Next button Enter your Email Address Click the Next button The next screen will ask My incoming email server is a server Select IMAP from the server drop down list Internet Connection Wizard xj E mail Server Names My incoming mail server is a IMAP x server Incoming mail POP3 or IMAP server EE An SMTP server is the server that is used for your outgoing e mail Outgoing mail SMTP server a o ooo lt Back Next Cancel Help Please Note We recommend that you use an IMAP email server However Exchangelt will work with POP3 email servers but you may lose your abi
227. h data Ifyou select Yes your backup is slower but takes up less space on the idb disk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 180 Backup amp Restore e Ifyou select No your backup is faster but uses more space on the idb disk 3 Select how often you want the system to perform a backup from the drop down list 4 Select when you want the system to perform a final back up from the drop down list It is recommended that you select a time when nobody is using the system i e late at night or early in the morning 5 Enter the name of the administrator to whom backup reports should be emailed Please Note If you have the SMTP server enabled you can enter any email address in this field 6 Choose how much information to put in the backup reports with the Email Log Level drop down menu Your options are Error Warning and Information Please Note Normally backup reports will only include error messages but you can also choose to include warnings or non critical information All messages are available from the system logs whether they are included in the backup reports or not 7 Click on the Save Changes button to save your selections The idb system automatically performs the backup procedure Initiating an idb Backup Although the idb system automatically performs backup procedures without input from a system administrator you can turn off idb and manually initiate a backup from the Backup Files menu located under the S
228. h to create a new folder to be shared simply right click on Personal Folders and select New folder See the Exchangelt Usage Guide for more details Click the Exchangelt Permissions tab Click the Add button Choose a User from the drop down list with whom you wish to share the information Add permission x Choose user team OK webmaster Cancel Select a Permission Level to grant to that user from the drop down list To add more than one user at a time click on the Apply button and repeat steps 3 5 Con tinue to the next step Click the OK button Permission levels are used to grant different levels of access to users viewing public folders Read allows users to view information Read Write allows users to view and add information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 293 Exchangelt Read Write Admin allows users to view and add information modify permissions and to create and delete subfolders To Share Information Using the Public Folder 1 Right click on a team folder of which you are a team member in the Outlook Public Folder list in either the Outlook Shortcuts or Folder List and select Properties Please Note If you wish to create a new folder to be shared simply right click on the team folder of which you are a team member in Public Folders and select New folder See the Exchangelt Usage Guide for more details Please Note New folders cannot be created under the Public Folders pa
229. hat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 335 Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of fol lowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribu tion conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserv ing the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARG
230. hat violate the security policy Allaccess requests from private service and public network clients to send traffic to the Nitix powered server itself that violate the security policy All attempts to authenticate at an Administrative Interface on the Nitix powered server itself All access requests from private service and public network clients to send traffic to the Nitix powered server itself on the port or ports used for Remote Administration Each Startup The logs contain the following information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 270 Log Messages Date and Time when the event occurred with an accurate Date Timestamp Protocol TCP UDP ICMP other Source IP Address Destination IP Address Destination Port TCP and UDP or Message Type ICMP Disposition of the event Blocked allowed etc To view the firewall log you must be a member of the Log team The firewall log file will then appear in team folder on Nitix This team is automatically created by Nitix To add a user to the Log team 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main User Setup screen displays TEAM SETUP ADMIN SETUP User ID Teams PPTP Dial In FIP Exchangelt Emails Disk Space Used USER SETUP User ID ADD NEW USER ADD NEW TEAM IMPORT USERS PASSWORD POLICY T Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 271 Log Messages 2 Click on the appro
231. hat you seek the help of a qualified programmer to create your own Generating Dynamic Web Sites The following PHP script is used to render the example address book into a dynamic web site 1 Enter the following script into a text file and save it as addressbook php lt table gt lt php mysql connect localhost john password mysql select db john result mysgl query SELECT FROM AddressBook while line mysql fetch array result list name phone line for i 0 i lt sizeof name i echo lt tr gt lt td gt name i lt td gt lt td gt phone i lt td gt lt tr gt n gt lt table gt 2 Inthe Windows Network Neighborhood copy the script in John s WWW folder on the local server 3 Open an Internet browser on your workstation In the address bar of the browser enter http servername john addressbook php 4 The address book opens in the browser Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 266 Chapter 28 Hardware Components Reporting Hardware Components Reporting Nitix has the capability to report on hardware that is detected in the server including pro cessors memory Ethernet and hard drives and verify whether that hardware is currently supported by the version of Nitix being run The Hardware Status screen displays the details of all the hardware on the system as well as information pertaining to the compatibility support of the hardware within th
232. he archive can be accessed through a shared folder in IMAP or through WebMail Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 120 Email Services Configuring Email Service 1 Select E Mail from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The E Mail Setup screen displays POP 3 SSL secure mail reader server Web Mail Server Requires IMAP MySQL and secure WWW servers Exchangelt Server Requires MySQL and both WWW servers LDAP directory server RBL spam blocke Mail Virus Scanner Mail Logging Minutes between remote POP mailbox chec Mail Domain ISP s SMTP Server ISP s SMTP Username ISP s SMTP Password BL EMAIL ALIASES s SAVE CHANGES CLEAR EMAIL QUEUE CANCEL CHANGES 2 Select the appropriate SMTP server setting Selecting Yes enables the SMTP server and allows any computer on the internal network or on the Internet to send email using the Nitix powered server as a mail server Messages from computers on the Internet are accepted only if their desti nation is the local domain hosted by your Nitix server This prevents your server and Internet bandwidth from being used to send unsolicited emails Selecting Only Trusted Hosts enables the SMTP server and allows internal users and users connected to the internal network through a VPN to send email using the Nitix powered server as their mail server Selecting No disables the SMTP server complete
233. he documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org 4 The names Apache Server and Apache Group must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 305 GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
234. he following screen displays Internet Connection Wizard Check E mail Addresses 5 Indicate whether or not you want your email client to check addresses using the LDAP directory Please Note If this option is selected you can enter partial email addresses when sending emails Outlook will automatically find the closest match in the LDAP directory and enter the correct email address Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 133 Email Services 6 Click on the Next button The following screen displays ix 7 Click on the Finish button The Internet Accounts screen re displays Click on the Prop erties button Select the Advanced tab on the screen that displays 8 The Advanced screen displays 9 Inthe Search Base field enter o example com Please Note Replace example com with the Internet domain hosted by your Nitix powered server 10 Click on the OK button The Internet Accounts screen re displays Click on the Close but ton The LDAP server is now set up and users can search through the LDAP data direc tory for the names and email addresses of Nitix users Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 134 Chapter 13 WebMail WebMail Server Nitix s WebMail server allows you to access your email using a standard web browser from any workstation connected to the Internet Your communications are kept secure with SSL encryption Please refer to the Nitix WebMail Usage Guide for specific functionaliti
235. his Package s interfaces visible to the end user of the commercial distribution Such use shall not be construed as a distribution of this Package 9 The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 10 THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 317 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 318 Appendix F Australian National University License Copyright The Australian National University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documenta tion advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowl edge that the software was developed by the Australian National University The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 319 Nitix
236. ict with standard executa bles which must also be provided and provide a separate manual page for each non standard executable that clearly documents how it differs from the Standard Version d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder 4 You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or executable form pro vided that you do at least ONE of the following a distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library files together with instruc tions in the manual page or equivalent on where to get the Standard Version b accompany the distribution with the machine readable source of the Package with your modifications c give non standard executables non standard names and clearly document the differences in manual pages or equivalent together with instructions on where to get the Standard Ver sion d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder 5 You may charge a reasonable copying fee for any distribution of this Package You may charge any fee you choose for support of this Package You may not charge a fee for this Package itself However you may distribute this Package in aggregate with other possibly commercial programs as part of a larger possibly commercial software distribution pro Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 316 vided that you do not advertise this Package as a product of your own You may embed this Package s interpreter within an ex
237. il file web and FTP services are tightly integrated Every user and team account that is created has instant and automatic access to all of these services When a user is cre ated a number of things happen in the background a login account is created and the password defined by the administrator is assigned to that account a personal user directory is created on the server This directory is accessible in Windows Network Neighborhood or on Macintosh s AppleShare drive If NFS is enabled UNIX and similar systems can use the path export home username to access this directory For example the path for someone with the username janedoe would be export home janedoe a WWW directory is created within the user s personal directory Any file stored in this directory is automatically published on the user s personal web page an FTP account which points directly to the user s personal directory is created for the user If the user logs in to the FTP server using the proper user name and password they can access the files in their personal directory an email account is created for the user Email is available through either POP3 IMAP or WebMail Similarly when a team is created a number of things happen in the background a team login account is created and the password defined by the administrator is assigned to that account a team directory is created This directory is accessible to all team members in Window s Ne
238. il message to an ISP s SMTP server If you use your Nitix server as an SMTP server large files are quickly transferred over the high speed LAN Although a file is then slowly transferred over your Internet connection your email client is free to perform other tasks Enter the following information when configuring your email client Inthe SMTP server field enter the IP address or host name provided to you by your ISP Alternatively use your Nitix server as the SMTP server and enter the IP address or host name of your Nitix powered server Inthe POP3 or IMAP server field enter the IP address or host name provided to you by your ISP Inthe POP3 or IMAP mailbox name field enter the first part of your email address For example if your email address is j ohndoe example com enter Johndoe into this field Inthe POP3 or IMAP password field enter the password provided to you by your ISP 2 If your mail is hosted on your Nitix powered server Enter the following information when configuring your email client Inthe SMTP server field enter the IP address or host name of your Nitix powered server You do not need to enter the domain name Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 130 Email Services Inthe POP3 or IMAP server field enter the IP address or host name of your Nitix powered server Internet Connection Wizard ix E mail Server Names My incoming mail server is a a server Incoming mail POP3 IMAP
239. iles and new files created by users since the last backup are not recoverable New Hard Disk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 254 Disk Management Installing a New Hard Drive oak oN Turn off the main power Remove the disk from the unit Insert a new hard disk into the drive Turn the main power back on Press the power button When an IP address appears on the display panel console insert your last idb cartridge Please Note Skip this step if your idb disk is already in Initiate a Restore from WebConfig Please Note See Chapter 17 Backup and Restore The length of the restore process depends on the size of your hard disk and the amount of data that has to be restored The entire process can take up to several hours Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 255 Disk Management Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 256 Chapter 27 MySQL Server What is the MySQL Server MySQL is an advanced database administration tool that can be used to store dynamic web page data for services such as on line catalogues and stores create accounting databases and create address books MySQL is an advanced feature for users that are familiar with data bases and SQL Structured Query Language For more information go to http www mysql com If the MySQL server is enabled users on the internal network can access personal databases and the databases of any teams that they belong to Because WebMail uses
240. in name will replace the Windows workgroup Please Note The Windows file server must be enabled for the domain controller to function Please Note Your network domain name has nothing to do with your internet domain name They do not interact and are independent of each other Advice Recommendation Do not use the same internet domain name as your local network domain name Configuring the Domain Controller To enable Nitix s domain controller function Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 103 NT Domain Services 1 Select File under Server Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays FILE SERVER SETUP Enable File Virus Scanner Enable Macintosh file server Yes No Enable Windows file server ONo Wiehe cesT WORKGROUP Actas Domain Member Domain Member Admin username Domain Member Admin password Domain Member Re enter admin password Actas Domain Controller Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles Domain Controller Admin password username is root Domain Controller Re enter admin password Enable NFS file server Mapping scheme for NFS PERMISSIONS SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Ensure that the Windows file server is enabled 3 Enter a name in the Windows workgroup name field This will be the domain name once the domain controller is enabled Avoid using the default name of Workgroup as it
241. in the power cords for the server and monitor Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 21 First time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware Configuring Your System IMPORTANT For installation the system must boot from the CD ROM This can be accomplished through the boot settings in the motherboard s BIOS Nitix will install onto the hard disks after they have been configured through the WebConfig menu For first time disk configuration do not use the Disk Install option on the Console menu For more information on configuring your hard disks see Chapter 26 Disk Management IMPORTANT Configurations will be lost when you reboot if you are running Nitix from the CD ROM with out configured hard disks Please Note These are general setup guidelines 1 Connect the power cord and turn on the main power 2 Connect your LAN connection to the Ethernet port 0 on the server Connect the other end of the cable into your LAN hub or switch Please Note If you have additional Ethernet ports to connect to the Internet or to other segments of your LAN connect them now 3 Connect a monitor and keyboard to the appropriate connectors on the server 4 Turn on the power button 5 When the system boots the Nitix boot screen will display Please choose one of the following boot options Launch Nitix Compatibility Burn in Tests 3 Memory Test To load Nitix select option 1 Launch Nitix by typing then pressing lt Enter gt Pleas
242. inal library and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such Because of this blurred distinction using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing because most developers did not use the librar ies We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better However unrestricted linking of non free programs would deprive the users of those pro grams of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of non free programs to use free libraries while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 348 incorporated in them We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library while the latter only works together with the library Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS
243. inary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRAN TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR OTHER CODE CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPE CIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIA BILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSI BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 367 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 368 Appendix U mod ssl License LICENSE The mod ssl package falls under the Open Source Software label because it s distributed under a BSD style license The detailed license information follows Copyright O Ralf S Engelschall All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
244. ine enter this number as well For example enter 9 123 123 1234 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 59 Configuring Nitix 5 Enter the Internet account username provided by your ISP 6 Enter the account password provided by your ISP 7 Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly If the passwords do not match you will be asked to re enter your password in both fields 8 Indicate the number of idle seconds before automatic disconnection Please Note If you enter zero the connection will never automatically disconnect Be careful with this setting especially if you do not have an unlimited Internet access package from your ISP 9 Select the appropriate dialing mode Select Yes if you want the Nitix powered server to dial automatically to the Inter net when someone tries to reach it Select No if you want to manually initiate a connection by clicking Dial Modem on the System Status page e Select Only as a last resort if you want to use a dial up connection when one or more of your high speed connections fail The dial up connection will stay active until one of the high speed connections becomes functional Although all traffic is forwarded to the high speed connection when it returns to normal the dial up connection remains active for a few minutes in case the high speed connection fails again In that case the system re routes traffic back to the dial up connection immediately without having to wai
245. ings for eth et 1 92 168 212 1 rte 55 255 255 0 Trust computers on this network pass them Oves SP through the firewall me Choose address automatically Yes DHCP Client ID leave blank to use hostname Use default gateway on this link Q Yes _ SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES c Change the appropriate settings and click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 56 Configuring Nitix 2 Nitix powered server as a Workgroup Server and Dial up Gateway to the Internet van Hub Switch Dial up line Internet d Er ca S Nitix powered server If Nitix has automatically chosen the proper IP addresses there is nothing else for you to change If you want to change the Nitix powered server s local IP addresses you can do so by clicking the Edit button on the line describing the parameters for the Ethernet 0 interface The default route is automatically determined when Nitix dials in to the Internet In this case there should be no default route entry in the Routes Table 3 Nitix powered server as a Workgroup Server and High speed Gateway to the Inter net Hub Switch cuu N Router Internet Nitix powered server Kr ZEIT Nitix auto configures its parameters ifthe ISP uses DHCP as a means of automatic net work configuration In this case there should be nothing for you to do on the Advanced Network Setup screen although you can change the address
246. ions 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified execut able containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 342 of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mecha nism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s com puter system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modi fied version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have al
247. is FastForward Nitix s FastForward technology allows you to forward Internet traffic from a specific address and interface to another address and interface A subsystem that performs this function is usually called a Proxy Server When computers on the Internet access services on your internal protected network they talk through your Nitix powered server FastForward makes sure that these untrusted com puters can only access the information and services that you want them to If FastForward is disabled no one can see anything on your local network because Nitix acts as a firewall If you enable FastForward you are making a protected hole in your firewall that allows computers on the outside to access your network To decide whether you want to use FastForward you need to decide whether it is worth the added security risk Because you are affecting the firewall security of your network it is very important that you understand what you are doing while configuring FastForward You might want to seek qualified advice Introduction to TCP IP Entire books have been written on this subject To save you some time we ll try to explain everything you need in a page or two Earlier in this guide we talked about how each com puter on the Internet must have a unique IP address But that s not the whole story Network protocols come in layers IP is just one of those layers The job of IP is to get data split it into small chunks called
248. is still under development in particular to extend its usability with other products however it has been proven to be compatible with select products using spe cific configurations For a complete list of tested products and configurations please go to http www net itech com downloads IPSec_Compatibility Adding an IPsec route 1 Login to Nitix with your administrator username and password WebConfig s System Status page displays 2 Select VPN from the Network Setup menu The VPN Setup screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 205 IPsec 3 Select Psec Setup from the VPN Setup screen The IPsec Setup screen displays IPSEC ROUTES Remote Server Remote Subnet Local Subnet 192 168 21 0 24 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 21 0 24 ADD NEW ROUTE HOME 4 Select Add New Route The Create IPsec Route screen displays CREATE IPSEC ROUTE Remote subnet Local subnet i mia Sharedkey g Was that an RSA public key or a preshared secret key P SK g Perfect Forward Secrecy PF T SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 5 Inthe Remote Server field enter the fully qualified domain name FQDN or IP address of the remote server you wish to connect to 6 To include a private subnet behind the remote server s firewall enter the internal IP address of the remote unit as well as the subnet in the Remote subnet field
249. itions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section 1s held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum stance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of pro tecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of soft ware distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system 1t is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee
250. iver for Linux section 3b Linux section 3b Linux Access Control Lists section 3b Linux Extended Attributes Linux Base Driver for Intel Pro 1000 Family Adapters section 3b Linux MegaRAID IDEal Software RAID Stack 3b Linux user space NFS server section 3b Linux WAN router utilities section 3b Logical Volume Manager section 3b Marvell Yukon SysKonnect SK 98xx Gigabit Linux Drive section 3b mdadm section 3b Memtest86 section 3b MySQL section 3b nForce nvaudio amp nvgart section 3b Netatalk section 3b Netfilter IPTables section 3b NIS client tools section 3b NIS version 2 server section 3b phpMyAdmin section 3b PoPToP section 3b ppp section 3b pptp linux section 3b ProFTPd section 3b quota tools section 3b Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 299 GNU Library General Public License v 2 GNU Lesser General Public License v 2 1 Gregory M Christy License HighPoint License Internet Software Consortium License LILO License Linux Pam License mod_auth_pam License mod_ssl License NVIDIA Software License OpenLDAP Public License v 2 7 OpenSSL License OSSP Project License Pedro Roque Marques License Roaring Penguin PPP over Ethernet section 3b rlpr section 3b rysnc section 3b samba section 3b Smartmontools section 3b SYSLINUX section 3b Filesystem in USErspace section 6c FreeS WAN section 6c Horde Application Framework
251. ix User Manual Version 4 0 273 Mounting an NFS directory Mounting an NFS directory In order to mount a directory you must have super user privileges Follow these steps to mount an NFS directory 1 If necessary install ugidd on your workstation 2 From a shell prompt enter showmount e weaver Please Note This step is optional If you already know what directories you are able to mount pro ceed to step 3 3 At the prompt enter for example mount NFSdir localdir Please Note ocaldir is the path to an existing directory on the local network NFSdir is specified as hostname path directory For example to mount the home directory of the user josefk under the local directory mnt josefk enter the following information mount weaver export home josefk mnt josefk Unmounting an NFS Directory You should unmount when you are done with a mounted directory or when you are going to logout From a shell prompt enter for example umount mnt josefk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 274 Chapter 31 VSYNC What is rsync It stands for remote synchronization rsync is a utility that provides a very fast method for remote files to be kept in synchronization with the files on the Nitix server It does this by sending just the differences in the files to the remote site without requiring both sets of files to be present beforehand rsync can only be utilized with a unix type remote system Using rsync
252. kets directly to another computer if its subnet number is the same That means that 192 168 1 15 will transmit directly to 192 168 1 46 since they are both on the same subnet However 192 168 1 15 cannot send packets directly to 192 168 2 20 the subnet numbers are Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 199 Tunnel Vision similar but they are not the same The station then sends the data through its default gate way Nitix server 1 Now TunnelVision can work its magic as long as you ve configured the Nitix powered serv ers to create a VPN you ll do that later in this chapter When TunnelVision starts it creates an encrypted connection between the two Nitix powered servers through the Internet This connection is sometimes called a steel pipe because like a true steel pipe it s hard to see what s inside or to break through it More often it is known as a tunnel Nitix server 1 treats data addressed to Network 2 from its local Ethernet in a special way Rather than just passing the data to your ISP Nitix encrypts it and sends it through the tun nel When Nitix server 2 receives the encrypted data it decrypts the information and for wards it on to Network 2 as if it had arrived directly from Network 1 That way Network 1 can communicate securely with Network 2 without any need for special changes to indi vidual workstations Creating a VPN server to server Because your Nitix powered server does most of the w
253. kup After a complete system restore all existing files are overwritten with older copies from the backup disk However new files saved to the hard drive after the backup are left untouched A com plete system restore should generally be initiated only when recovering from complete hard disk failure Specific Directory Restore It is possible to restore a specific user or team network directory if these files have been lost or mistakenly deleted A specific directory restore can only be initiated from the Backup menu There are two types of specific directory restore procedures Normal Restore The contents of a user or team directory get overwritten like with a complete system restore Safe Mode Restore The contents of a user or team directory get restored into a new subdirectory called Restore which is created in the user or team directory Users can browse through the content of the directory from the disk copy any needed files and then delete the Restore sub directory Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 183 Backup amp Restore 3 Specific File Restore It is possible to restore a specific user or team s network files if they have been lost or mistakenly deleted A specific file restore can only be initiated from the Backup menu There are two types of specific directory restore procedures Normal Restore The file gets overwritten like with a complete system restore Safe Mode Restore The file
254. lays Use the Left and Right direction arrows to move the cursor from digit to digit Use the Up and Down direction arrows to increase or decrease a digit s value Press the Enter button The new Netmask is saved You may also turn on or off the DHCP server which automatically assigns IP addresses to the workstations connected to your local network Unless you have some other server providing DHCP services it is recommended that you turn DHCP on To do so navigate to DHCP using the direction arrows Press the Enter button 10 Navigate to On using the direction arrows Press Enter The DHCP server is now on 11 Press the Cancel button twice to return back to the standard status display Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 20 Chapter 2 First time Nitix Setup Third Party Hardware When setting up Nitix on third party hardware please refer to the vendor s documentation for product overview and installation instructions Minimum Server Requirements To successfully run the Nitix OS the following must be satisfied Minimum Server Requirements x86 based system At least one IDE and or SCSI hard disk At least one Network Interface Card IDEor SCSI CD ROM drive e VGA based video card Required External Peripherals Monitor e Keyboard Before You Begin 1 Connect the monitor cable to the VGA based Video Card output on the server 2 Connect the keyboard to the keyboard input on the server 3 Plug
255. lease Note All web files for that server reside in the team s directory and will not be deleted unless the team maintaining the site is deleted as well Editing a Virtual Web Server 1 Click on the Virtual Domains button on the WWW Setup screen The Virtual Domains screen displays showing all existing virtual domains Click on the appropriate server s Edit Action button The Modify Virtual Domain screen displays MODIFY VIRTUAL DOMAIN Trusted hosts only Enable users personal home pages SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES noon M Mar STEEL Change the appropriate server settings Click on the Save Changes button Hosting Multiple Web Sites If your Nitix powered server will be used as a web hosting platform for a number of web sites owned by various customers you should use the following strategy For example if your Nitix powered server will be used to serve a web site for AcmeWidgets 1 2 Create a team called AcmeWidgets Create a virtual web server and choose the AcmeWidgets team as the Webmaster team Anyone from AcmeWidgets can access these files using FTP Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 161 Web Services Secure Web Services Secure Socket Layer SSL Encryption Nitix s web server can serve secure web pages which are transmitted over the Internet using Secure Socket Layer SSL encryption technology All browsers on the market support SSL encryption For SSL
256. lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copy right notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sect
257. lity to have your mail remotely accessible Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 282 Exchangelt 8 Enter the name of your incoming mail server this is the name of the Nitix powered server 9 Enter the name of your outgoing mail server this is the name of the Nitix powered server 10 Click the Next button 11 Enter your Account name and Password password is optional Please Note Ensure that the Log on Secure Password Authentication SPA is not checked Internet Connection Wizard B x Internet Mail Logon Type the account name and password your Intemet service proyider has given you Account name Janyuser Password IV Remember password If your Internet service provider requires you to use Secure Password Authentication SPA to access your mail account select the Log On Using Secure Password Authentication SPA check box Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA lt Back Cancel Help 12 Click the Next button 13 Select which method you want to use to connect to the Internet local area network 14 Click the Next button 15 Click the Finish button Directory Services Setup 1 In Outlook select Tools gt Accounts 2 Select Add gt Directory Services 3 The Internet Connection Wizard screen appears Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 283 Exchangelt 4 Enter your Internet directory LDAP server name this is the name of the Nitix powered server Click
258. ly Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 121 Email Services Select the appropriate POP3 server setting Selecting Yes enables the POP3 server and allows any computer on the internal network or on the Internet to access the POP3 mailbox Select Yes only if you have users who will be accessing their email from outside of the office Selecting Only Trusted Hosts enables the POP3 server and allows internal users to access the POP3 mailbox Selecting No disables the POP3 server completely Select the appropriate POP3 SSL server setting Selecting Yes will allow incoming secure POP 3 connections from anywhere This means that your users could download their email from anywhere on the Internet Select Only Trusted Hosts to allow incoming secure POP 3 connections only from the local network and not from the Internet e Select No to disable the secure POP 3 server Select the appropriate IMAP server setting Selecting Yes enables the IMAP server and allows any computer on the internal network or on the Internet to access the IMAP mailbox Select Yes only if you have users who will be accessing their email from outside of the office Selecting Only Trusted Hosts enables the IMAP server and allows internal users to access the IMAP mailbox Selecting No disables the IMAP server completely Select the appropriate IMAP SSL server setting Selecting Yes will allow incoming secure IMAP connections from anywhere This mea
259. m internally distribute within Your organization and Externally Deploy Your Modifications and Covered Code for commercial or non commercial purposes provided that in each instance You also meet all of these conditions a You must satisfy all the conditions of Section 2 1 with respect to the Source Code of the Covered Code b You must duplicate to the extent 1t does not already exist the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code of all Your Modifications and cause the modified files to carry prom inent notices stating that You changed the files and the date of any change and c If You Externally Deploy Your Modifications You must make Source Code of all Your Externally Deployed Modifications either available to those to whom You have Externally Deployed Your Modifications or publicly available Source Code of Your Externally Deployed Modifications must be released under the terms set forth inthis License including the license grants set forth in Section 3 below for as long as you Externally Deploy the Cov ered Code or twelve 12 months from the date of initial External Deployment whichever is longer You should preferably distribute the Source Code of Your Externally Deployed Mod ifications electronically e g download from a web site 2 3 Distribution of Executable Versions In addition if You Externally Deploy Covered Code Original Code and or Modifications in object code exe cutable form only You must incl
260. m sm am 38 3m 3 3m sm 35 58 az 5E a E so sm 3 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 147 WebMail 2 To configure your calendar Click on the Options button The Options screen displays Click on any of the headings such as Language and Date and Time Options Follow the instructions on the screen that displays Click on the Save Options button to save your changes and return to the Options screen 3 To change the calendar display click on one of the date buttons your options are Today Day Work Week Week and Month 4 To schedule an event click on the New Event button Enter all appropriate information on the screen that displays and click on the Save Event button 5 To import a calendar from another source Click on the Import Export button The Import Export screen displays Import Calendar Select the source to import from CSV Lar importing CSV data does the first row contain the field names Browse Export Calendar Select the format to export to CSV Select the file to import Limit the time span to export C Allevents Start On 2002 z Nov 1118 A ahoz oz am C om End On 2002 z Dec z n gt At 10 OO v am C PM Inthe mport Calendar section of the screen select the format to export from your options are CSV and Outlook Select the file to import Either enter the file name directly into the empty field or select it by clicking in the Browse
261. m using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 349 Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d
262. menu and select Yes in the Enable WWW Server field Then ask a friend outside the local network if they can view your domain Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 229 Domain Name Services Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS is a Nitix feature that allows you to publish DNS entries and provide Internet services even if you have a dynamic IP address as opposed to a static IP address When you register your domain with a registrar you give them the address of the primary server and backup server owned by Net Integration Technologies which already have static IP addresses When your Nitix powered server connects to the Internet it automatically informs the Net Integration Technologies servers about your current IP address and asks them to publish your up to date DNS information You need to provide a Domain Registrar with the following DNS server addresses 1 dyndnsl ivivanet com 209 5 34 82 2 dyndns2 ivivanet com 207 176 197 14 All you need to do then is set your Public DNS Server to Dynamic Nitix does the rest Please Note Dynamic DNS services require a direct connection to the Internet via a modem or router It will not work behind a NAT device Manually Creating DNS Entries Based on the servers you have enabled Nitix automatically decides which DNS names to publish For example if your domain name is example com and the Enable WWW Server option is set to Yes not Trusted Hosts Only then Nitix automatically publishes the DNS n
263. mer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 377 LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS IN
264. n Information used by the SSL protocol to establish a secure connection Contains information about who a certificate belongs to who issued it its unique serial number its valid dates and its encrypted fingerprint that is used to verify the contents of the certificate See also SSL A computer or software package that provides specific services to a client The term can refer to a particular piece of software such as a web server or to the machine on which the software is running A single server can run several different server software packages Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 417 SNMP SMTP SQL SSL Subnet TCP IP Telnet UDP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol used to collect statistical information from a host about parameters such as central processing unit CPU utilization Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol used for transferring or sending email messages between servers Another protocol such as POP3 is used to retrieve the messages Structured Query Language A language used to create advanced databases Secure Sockets Layer A protocol that allows encrypted authenticated communications to travel across the Internet SSL is used mostly in communications between web browsers and web servers URLs that begin with https indicate that an SSL connection is being used Each side of an SSL connection must send a valid Security Certificate to the other Each side then
265. n which is automatically backed up every time any backup is performed Restoring system configura tion files will overwrite the current system configuration so be very careful with this setting It is recommended that you leave the default setting No RESTORE FILES These directories can be restored Restore jinglebells2 weavernetr CONFIG webmaster PERFORM RESTORE 4 Indicate which directories you want included in the restore procedure e Select Yes if you want this directory restored in normal mode where the contents of the directory get overwritten e Select No if you do not want this directory restored Select Safe if you want the directory restored in safe mode where the contents of the directory are saved in the Restore file Please Note Selecting all directories is the equivalent of performing a full system restore 5 Click on the Perform Restore button to begin the restore procedure Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 185 Backup amp Restore Initiating a File Restore from the WebConfig Menu 1 Select Backup from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main Backup Setup screen displays BACKUP SETUP Enable hackup compression smaller slower Backup every Day begins at E Mail backup reports to E Mail log level SAVE CHANGES T BACKUP FILES RESTORE FILES 2 Click on the Restore Files button which displ
266. n Update Exchangeli Server pne miel e EN EN pie fia e E meme o aaa per e pee piter e is E rores ham reboot shutdown Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 41 Connecting to WebConfig Features of the System Status screen CPU Utilization Ethernet 0 Ethernet 1 and 2 PPP link Disk Load Disk Space Used System Status Details Button Displays the utilization of the system s central processing unit CPU in numerical form and as a bar graph During intensive operations such as backups or very heavy file transfers the CPU utilization bar might show 100 This is normal One hun dred per cent utilization simply means that the CPU is being fully utilized and does not necessarily mean that your Nitix powered server is being overloaded or that per formance will suffer However if the CPU utilization is constantly at 100 and you experience service slow downs you might want to contact support for a services review Displays the speed of data transfer through Ethernet Port 0 measured in kbps or Mbps The bar graph displays the speed as a percentage of the highest transfer rate recorded since the last power up Displays the speed of data transfer through the Ethernet Ports 1 and 2 measured in kbps or Mbps The bar graph displays the speed as a percentage of the highest trans fer rate recorded since the last power up Displays the spee
267. n the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 123 Email Services Clearing the Email Queue Clear Email Queue allows you to clear the outgoing email queue 1 Select Email from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Email Setup screendisplays 2 Click on the Clear Email Queue button The Clear email queue prompt displays Clear email queue Are you sure you wish to clear your email queue Yes No 3 Click on Yes to clear the email queue You will be brought back to the Email Setup screen Configuring Email Aliases The Email Alias feature allows you to assign an email address that is used for redirection of the incoming email to one or more recipients The incoming mail may also be redirected to external email addresses Create Email Alias Account 1 Select E Mail from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The E Mail Setup screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 124 Email Services 2 Click on the Email Aliases button The Email Aliases screen displays EMAIL ALIASES ADD ALIAS s HOME 3 Click on the Add Alias button The New Email Alias screen displays NEW EMAIL ALIAS Alias name SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 4 Enter the alias email address in the Alias name box An email that is sent to an email alias will be sent to the target s that you specify For example if you want th
268. n this screen and then on the ODBC Data Source Administrator screen 15 Open Microsoft Access 16 Create a database named address book The following screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 264 MySQL Server i address book Database slol x E Tables E Queries E E8 Forms B Reparts a Macros E Modules Desian 17 Anywhere in this window right click your mouse Select Link Tables 18 In the Files of Type section of the screen that displays select ODBC Databases The Select Data Source screen displays 19 Select the Machine Data Source tab and select MySQL Address Book The Link Tables screen displays 20 Select the appropriate table and click on the OK button The following screen displays i address book Database lol x E Tables E Queries E ES Forms B Reports 2 Macros L4 Modules Open Design Ze 21 Make sure the appropriate table is highlighted and click on the OK button The table opens in Microsoft Access Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 265 MySQL Server What is a Dynamic Web Site Dynamic web sites such as online stores or catalogues use databases to store information and PHP or Perl script to produce the web page based on the data stored in the database This allows the changing information to be reflected on the site as it changes Please Note Dynamic web sites require advanced knowledge of PHP or Perl script and it is advisable t
269. nces Mail Setup Mail Format Spelling Security Other Exchangelt Message store Personal Folders Server server domain con User name anyusei Password n IV Automatically synchronize with server every 10 im minutes Exchangelt Add in for Outlook em m 4 Choose how often you wish the Exchangelt server and Outlook to synchronize data 5 Click on the OK button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 292 Exchangelt Using Exchangelt Sharing Information with Outlook Folders Exchangelt enables you to share any of your Calendar Contacts Tasks Notes or Journal files in your Personal Folders with other user s These shared folders are only open to those who are given permission by the creator or the owner of the folder By default no one but you has permission to access your Personal Folders If you are part of a Nitix team account you can also create shared folders in the Public Folders These shared folders are useful if you want to allow other team members to see information such as an office wide boardroom calendar or staff contact list For more detailed information on sharing folders please see the Exchangelt Usage Guide To Share Information Using the Personal Folder 1 7 Right click on the Outlook Personal Folder you wish to share i e Calendar Tasks Con tacts Journal in either the Outlook Shortcuts or Folder List and select Properties Please Note If you wis
270. nd password on the screen that displays 4 The following screen displays e Welcome to phpMyAdmin 2 5 7 pl1 Home MySQL 3 23 47 running on localhost as root localhost Databases MySQL phpMyAdmin Please select a i j SERT r Create new database Documentation r phpMyAdmin documentation r Show PHP information r Official php My Admin Homepage Show MySQL runtime information ChangeLog CVS Lists r r Show MySQL system variables Documentation r Show processes Documentation r Privileges r Databases r Export r Change password og out IE Io r 5 Select your username from the menu on the left hand side of the screen The following screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 258 MySQL Server e Database John running on localhost Home E ER Structure SQL Export Search Query Drop John z Run SQL query queries on database John Documentation John No tables found in database M Show this query here again Or Location of the textfile Max 51 200KB Compression Autodetect O None gzipped 6 To create a new database table enter the name of the table and the number of fields in the Create new table section of the screen 7 The following screen displays e Database Jolin Table AddressBook running on localhost Home John Field Doc Type d Length Valnes Attributer Nul Default Extra Primary Index Unique
271. ndows From the Start Menu select Programs gt Windows Explorer B UO d From the Tools menu select Folder Options Click on the File Types tab The File Types screen displays 5 Click on the New Type button The Add New File Type screen displays Add New File Type hx Description of type Associated extension PO ContentIype MIME 7 y Default Extension for Content Type m y Actions New Edit Get Default Enable Quick View IV Confirm open after download Always show extension Browse in same window OK Cancel Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 237 Workstation Viewer 6 Enter a description of the file type such as VNC Viewer Admin in the Description of Type field 7 Enter vnc in the Associated extension field 8 Enter application x vnc in the Content Type MIME field 9 Click on the New button The New Action window displays New Action xj Action Cancel Application used to perform action _ Cancel Browse Use DDE 10 Enter Open in the Action field 11 Enter c windows vncviewer exe config 1 in the Application used field Please Note c windows refers to the location where VNC has been installed The quotations around 31 are required 12 Click on the OK button VNC Viewer Admin displays in the Registered file types list of the File Types screen Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 238 STREET FastForward What
272. need NIS Service Please Note Nitix s built in Network Information Server NIS is used to share usernames and groups across a network to simplify user access Unix and similar systems can be configured to use NIS Nitix uses NIS version 2 10 Indicate whether or not you want to enable Nitix as an NTP Server Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 50 Configuring Nitix Please Note NTP Network Time Protocol client is required to synchronize the desktop clocks to the Nitix server 11 Choose whether or not to Restrict Outgoing Connections As part of Nitix s ICSA compli ance Nitix can restrict outgoing connections to a few protocols Enabling this option allows outgoing traffic based on the server s configuration All other traffic will be blocked See Chapter 22 Firewall Services for more information 12 Nitix synchronizes its clock from a source on the Internet To set the proper time select your Time Zone from the drop down list Nitix will attempt to auto detect the proper time zone and display its detected results for you 13 Click on the Save Changes button Configuring Advanced Network Settings The Advanced Network Settings screen allows you to configure some of Nitix s more advanced features Changing advanced network settings can cause odd behavior on your net work for example if you change your Nitix powered server s IP address or Netmask to an incorrect value you may not be able to reach it from your web b
273. nes the maximum amount of hard disk space allowed for a user s files Domain Name System A set of guidelines and rules that allows you to navigate the Internet using domain names instead of IP addresses Dynamic Domain Name System A system that automatically updates DNS information when a new IP address is assigned to a network A computer or server that matches an IP addresses to a domain name Some ISPs provide a spe cific DNS address Digital Subscriber Line A LAN that connects devices like computers printers and terminals Ethernet transmits data over twisted pair or coaxial cables at 10 or 100 Mbps Networking protocol used by Apple equipment connected directly to Ethernet The ability to create a passage or open a port through your firewall to a service or a server host ing a service See also Port Number A device that provides secure Internet access and protects internal networks from intruders Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 412 FTP Gateway HTML HTTP Hub Internet Gateway IMAP IMAP Server IP Address File Transfer Protocol An Internet based protocol used to copy files between computers usually a client and a server using Unix based command parameters You can download shareware or freeware applications that remove all the complexities of Unix and allow you to connect to FTP sites using a web browser A computer or server that is connected to multiple networks and is capable
274. nfig Le if a user is already set up and the administrator creates a Password Policy that user s password will be valid even if it does not meet the Policy criteria until he or she creates a new password When a user changes their password in their personal WebConfig screen to one that does not meet the Policy criteria they will get a pop up error message similar to the following Microsoft Internet Explorer x IN Error Password does not conform to password policy Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 84 User amp Team Management They will also receive an error message in WebConfig s Notices box telling them that their password was not changed ES Administrator Access Member of Teams SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Administrators are able to change a user s password to one that does not meet the Policy cri teria This allows administrators to set an easy to remember password for a new user until that user can go in and change his or her own password The administrator will receive an error message in WebConfig s Notices box warning him or her that the password does not meet the Policy criteria but that the password has been changed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 85 User amp Team Management Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 56 EDS File Services File Sharing Services Nitix is designed to provide high performance file sharing services for Windows
275. ng to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibili ties for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 347 can get the source code If you link a program with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Our method of protecting your rights has two steps 1 copyright the library and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library Also for each distributor s protection we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this fr
276. nly if the primary connection fails 7 Click on the Save Changes button Take A Snapshot Now that you have taken the time to configure Nitix you can use the Take Snapshot item in the left hand menu to display all the information available on one scrollable page Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 62 chapters Client Access Licenses Client Access Licenses or CALs allow individuals within your company to legally use the Nitix server operating system when you purchase a Nitix CAL you are purchasing the rights for a user to use the software Please Note Client access licensing requirements came into effect with Nitix software version 3 75 Client Access Licensing Requirements Nitix uses a Per User licensing model That is any number of individuals can connect to the Nitix powered server however you must purchase a Nitix Client Access License CAL for each individual or user account where access to Nitix services such as email file print and FTP services is needed For example if an individual is only utilizing the Nitix powered server as gateway or firewall that person does not require a CAL See Chapter 7 User and Team Management for more information Please Note Nitix CALs are not required for team accounts without a password team members can still access team data services using their personal user account passwords A defined number of Nitix CALs come with each version of the Nitix server operating sys
277. ns that your users could read their E Mail from anywhere on the Internet Select Only Trusted Hosts to allow incoming secure IMAP connections only from the local network and not from the Internet Select No to disable the secure IMAP server Select the appropriate WebMail server setting Selecting Yes enables the WebMail server Enabling the WebMail server automat ically enables the IMAP and WWW servers If you disable IMAP or the WWW servers the WebMail server will not be functional Selecting No disables the WebMail server completely Select the appropriate Exchangelt server setting Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 122 Email Services Selecting Yes enables the Exchangelt server Enabling the Exchangelt server automatically enables the MySQL and WWW servers If you disable MySQL or the WWW servers the Exchangelt server will not be functional Selecting No disables the Exchangelt server completely 9 Select the appropriate LDAP directory server setting Selecting Yes enables the LDAP server which answers directory queries The LDAP directory is automatically populated with the names and email addresses of all users configured on the Nitix powered server Selecting No disables the LDAP server completely 10 Select the appropriate RBL setting Select Strong RBL if you want to block known spam servers and spam relay serv ers Strong RBL blocks all spam mail but may also block other mail Senders
278. nsure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the applica tion does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 340 separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of deriva tive or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of anothe
279. nt to grant access to the Backup configu ration screens in WebConfig Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 188 Backup amp Restore idb Hot Swap Please Note Hot Swap is only supported on SCSI and specific IDE system configurations The Net Inte grator Mark and Mark II models support Hot Swap There four possible Hot Swap messages that can appear on the display panel console idb HotSwap OK This messages means that Hot Swap is supported and the idb disk is inactive so it can be safely removed and replaced with another idb drive DON T REMOVE IDB This message means that Hot Swap is supported but the disk is currently being used for a Backup Restore You must wait until you see the idb HotSwap OK message again before removing the disk NOBACKUP DISK This message means that Nitix does not detect the presence of an idb disk You should insert an idb disk and then choose the Update Disk Status link on the main page of WebConfig Please Note The No Backup Disk message will also display if the server is set up with all RAID disks and no idb disk s CAN T HOTSWAP This message means that Hot Swap is not supported on your server therefore you should never remove the idb disk without powering down the sys tem Please Note If you would like Hot Swap support please contact your Net Integration representative The idb software leaves the idb disk off until it needs to perform a backup or a restore Dur ing this
280. ntation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX PS HP LaserJet 55i Mopier PS HP LaserJet 6L PCL HP LaserJet BMP md HP LaserJet BP BMP PostScript HP aseclet Ill LaserMaster exmark Next Please Note If your printer is not listed click on the Have Disk button and provide the printer driver from the disk provided by your printer s manufacturer 6 Enter a name for the printer Indicate whether or not you want this printer to be used as the default printer Click on the Next button Add Printer Wizard You can type a name for this printer or you can use the name supplied below When you have finished click Next Do you want your Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer Yes No lt Back Cancel Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 117 Print Services 7 On the screen that displays indicate whether or not you want to print a test page Add Printer Wizard After your printer is installed Windows can print a test Page so you can confirm that the printer is set up properly Would you like to print a test page lt Back Cancel 8 Select Finish You will be prompted to insert your Win95 98 install disk Some files will be copied to your system and your shared printer will be setup and ready for printing Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 118 Chapter 12 Email Services C
281. nts Compliance The Net Integrator Micro meets Class B requirements The Net Integrator Mark I and Mark II systems meet Class A requirements Operating Conditions Net Integrator Micro e 100V 240VAC 1 5A 50Hz 60Hz e Oto 35 degrees Celsius 41 to 95 F e 10 80 Relative Humidity Net Integrator Mark I and Mark II e 100V 240VAC 8A 4A 50Hz 60Hz e Oto 35 degrees Celsius 41 to 95 F e 10 80 Relative Humidity Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Net Integration Technologies Inc could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Publication Date September 2004 Net Integration Technologies Technical Support If you need technical support please contact your Net Inte gration Technologies reseller Authorized Resellers may contact the toll free Reseller Tech nical Support Line 1 86 NET ITECH 1 866 384 8324 Outside of North America call 1 905 946 1777 Hours of operation Live Technical Support is available 24 5 from 12 00 a m ET Monday midnight Sunday to 4 00 a m ET Saturday and a Call Coordinator is available from 8 30 a m to 5 30 p m ET Monday through Friday When scheduled during the week via our Call Coordinator live weekend support is also available All other weekend Technical Support tickets will be responded to via email and will be answered within 3 hours on a best efforts basis Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Net Integration Technologi
282. oductory sequence you have a conversation and then you finish the call or as we say with TCP you close the connection TCP is used for more complicated network tasks like web browsing Two Way Connection m udi NR Proxy Servers Nitix acts as a firewall meaning that it blocks computers on the Internet from having access to your private servers If you want to make a service available to the outside world FastForward controls the con nection for you When someone outside wants to access the service they send the request to a port on your Nitix powered server FastForward then connects them to the service This process has two connections one from the client to the Nitix server and another from the Nitix server to the service When either the client or the server transmits information Nitix forwards it to the opposite end of the connection Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 241 Fastforward Forwarded Connection gine Live NN a f Theinternet Net hegmb As aresult you need to know the addresses and port numbers of both the source of informa tion and the destination of the information Nitix receives connection requests from the source address and forwards them to the destination If you want to use FastForward you probably already have a clear idea of what your destina tion address will be The source however may be more difficult to determine and ultimat
283. of this chapter explains how it can be configured Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 227 Domain Name Services Configuring Public DNS 1 Select Local from the Network Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Local Network Options screen displays LOCAL NETWORK OPTIONS Host Name Domain Name Enable rsync Server Actas public DNS Server Run DHCP server on Enable SNMP Server read only System Time from Interne Adjust Time Zon ADVANCED SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 The default DNS server setting is No meaning that you are not publishing any DNS entries This option only controls the DNS publishing server and how people outside your local network communicate with it The DNS publishing server is always active for computers on your local network If you want to provides services such as email to the outside world you need to enable the DNS server To do so select Yes or Dynamic Your choice depends on some relatively complex issues involved in domain name registration We will try to explain some of these issues in the following sections 3 Click on the Save Changes button when you have selected the appropriate DNS setting Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 228 Domain Name Services How the DNS System Works DNS Hierarchy The Internet DNS server network is arranged as a hierarchy in which a single root domain sometimes called dot
284. of your local network inter face if you wish to do so If your ISP assigns a unique static IP address network mask and default route Nitix will likely discover the proper default route but will not know which IP address to select Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 57 Configuring Nitix Although Nitix will find the available address and establish a proper connection to the Internet you should change the IP address of your Internet interface to the address assigned by your ISP You should do the same with the default route setting If you run into problems configuring advanced network settings contact technical support To change these settings a Inthe Network Devices section of the Advanced Network Settings screen click on the ethl Action button b The Network Settings screen displays Enter the new IP address and click on the Save Changes button c Inthe Network Routes section ofthe Advanced Network Settings screen click on the Default Action button the last entry in the list d The Modify Route screen displays Change the default route and click on the Save Changes button 4 Nitix powered server as a Domain Controller and High speed Gateway to the Inter net Hub Switch BP Router Cable Modem DSL Modem Internet Nitix powered server Nitix can serve as a Windows NT style domain controller for all the computers running Windows on the network As the domain controller Nitix will
285. ographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 389 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps direc tory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes soft ware written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBU TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distri bution licence including the GNU Public Licence Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 390 AORTAE Strace License Copyright Paul Kranenburg lt pk cs few eur nl gt
286. ol TCP IP ua nee Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in taskbar when connected Close Cancel 7 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP from the list and click on the Properties button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 32 Connecting to WebConfig 8 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties screen displays Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties xl General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically C Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically C Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Advanced Select Obtain IP Address automatically Select Obtain DNS server address automati cally 9 Click on the Advanced button The Advanced TCP IP Settings window displays Advanced TCP IP Settings 2 xl IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address DHCP Enabled Add Edit Remove r Default gateways Gateway Add Edit Remove Interface metric fl
287. omponents of the Email System The main components of Nitix s email delivery subsystem are the SMTP Server a mail delivery system When you send an email the SMTP server takes this message from your email client and delivers the message to the recipient s POP3 server If your ISP forces you to use a specific SMTP server Nitix can deliver to that server rather than directly to the destination servers This is known as a smarthost POP3 Server a system that receives a user s email messages and stores them in the user s mailbox When a user s email client checks for new mail it communicates with the POP3 server which ensures proper user authentication and delivery of email to the user s email client POP3 is the most commonly used mail delivery protocol POP3 SSL Server this is the secure POP3 server The Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet IMAP Server an advanced system that is similar to POP3 Because IMAP is relatively new not all mail clients support it IMAP offers superior user authentication and allows users to store their email on a server instead of downloading messages to a workstation as is the case with POP3 This allows users to check their email from various worksta tions and lets them see a complete list of the emails kept in their folders IMAP SSL Server this is the secure IMAP server The Secure Sockets
288. on Please Note Previous versions of Nitix required you to configure your browser to use a proxy server for web caching Although you no longer need do this web caching still functions if your browser is configured this way However if you plan to use web filtering in conjunction with web cach ing all proxy server settings must be removed Providing Full Internet Access To provide a specific user with access to all Internet sites 1 Enter their host name or IP address in the Workstations Exempt from Filtering section of the screen 2 Click on the Accept Action button The user displays in the list of workstations with full access Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 170 Web Filtering Adding Permitted Websites In order for users to access a specific website the administrator has to add it to the Permitted Web Sites list To do so follow these steps 1 Enter the site s name in the empty Web Site field 2 Click on the Accept Action button The site displays in the Permitted Web Sites list Please Note The administrator can include any subsection of the domain If www red blue org is requested the admin can add www red blue org red blue org or blue org Any sites ending with that domain are permitted for example if the administrator added red blue org then green red blue org would be allowed but violet blue org would not be allowed Accepting Access Requests If a user ha
289. on Newer versions of Netscape or Microsoft browsers are recommended 2 Read the IP address on the display panel console For demonstration purposes we will use the following address 192 168 0 1 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 37 Connecting to WebConfig 3 Enter https 192 168 0 1 8043 into the browser s address bar Press Enter on your keyboard The Create Administrator Account page displays Create Administrator Account Before you can use your server you must create an Administrator Account for yourself Don t forget your password Create Administrator AUREI System Administrator Password Activation Key leave blank to continue in trial mode amp SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 4 Enter a User ID The default User ID is root you can use that name or you can create a new ID by typing over the existing text Enter the administrator s full name Enter a password Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly ono Enter your organization s registered Internet domain name Leave the default name if you do not have one or if you are unsure about whether or not you have one 9 Enter your Software Activation Key in the Activation Key text box see below for more information on Software Activation Keys Please Note If you are already running Nitix version 3 76 or earlier the Activation Key field will automatically populate when you upgrade to 4 0 or later 10 Click on the Sav
290. on in a Fully Meshed mode and No if you are running it in a Non Meshed mode Please Note If you enable TunnelVision to work in fully meshed mode then your server can learn about other servers on the VPN by exchanging information through the Master Server Then each server will make connections directly to each of the other VPN connected servers directly as Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 202 TunnelVision needed without needing to go through the master If you disable fully meshed mode then your server will only communicate directly with the master server and the master s local network Your server will not be able to see any of the other VPN con nected servers or networks Please Note In previous versions of the Nitix software fully meshed mode was always enabled and this is still the recommended setting Enter the Master server s static IP address Enter the password that was used in step 6 of Configuring a Master Server Re enter the password to ensure it was entered correctly 6 IO m Click on the Save Changes button TunnelVision immediately begins to create the tunnel between the client and the master server If the client and the server are connected to the Internet and everything is configured correctly this process should only take a few sec onds Please Note To configure another Nitix powered server as a client simply repeat this process Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 203 TunnelVision
291. onvert to Team on the Modify User screen will convert a team into a user account All team members will be removed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 81 User amp Team Management Deleting Teams IMPORTANT Deleting a team means that the team s shared network directory and all of the files contained within the directory are deleted Once this is done none of the above can be recovered unless you restore the data from a previous backup 1 On the Main User Setup screen click on the appropriate team s Delete button 2 In the window that displays click on the OK button Password Policy The Password Policy feature allows an administrator to set restrictions on the format of pass words chosen by users For example the administrator can specify that upper case and lower case letters must be included in the password and or that passwords must be of a par ticular minimum length Please Note The Password Policy will only affect users when they change their password in WebConfig l e if a user is already set up and the administrator creates a Password Policy that user s password will be valid even if it does not meet the Policy criteria until he or she creates a new password Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 82 User amp Team Management Creating a Password Policy 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The main User Setup screen displays TEAM SETUP USER SETUP
292. open source license but doing so will not affect this Distribution other modifications made under this license or modifications made under other University of Washington licensing arrangements 7 no permission is granted to distribute publicly display or publicly perform modifications to the Distribution made using proprietary materials that cannot be released in source format under conditions of this license 8 the name of the University of Washington may not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to Distribution of the software without specific prior written permission This software is made available as is and THE UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON DIS CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFOR MANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 404 Appendix AL VPB Software License Copyright 1999 2002 Voicetronix www voicetronix com This software is a mixture of GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL and non LGPL software Please note 1 Any software
293. opy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the appli cation to use the modified definitions Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 352 b Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution c If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place d Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a spe
294. or HTTP server mail An SMTP server is the server that is used for your outgoing e mail Qutgoing mail SMTP server mail Inthe POP3 or IMAP mailbox name field enter your Nitix username Inthe POP3 or IMAP password field enter your Nitix password Internet Connection Wizard xj Internet Mail Logon Type the account name and password your Internet service provider has given you Account name fe edog Password m IV Remember password If your Internet service provider requires you to use Secure Password Authentication SPA to access your mail account select the Log On Using Secure Password Authentication SPA check box Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA cu cone Advanced Email Settings The following are advanced features of Nitix s email system POP Retriever Nitix can automatically retrieve emails from a remote mail account and store them in a user s local mailbox This means that instead of checking two accounts for new email users can simply check their local Nitix account Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 131 Email Services This has some advantages for the user particularly for emails with large attachments Normally users have to configure their mail clients to receive mail from a local account and a remote account With this dual mail box approach receiving emails with large file attachments from remote email accounts can be quite slow dep
295. ork for you creating a VPN is much easier than it sounds All you have to do is create the encrypted tunnel Using Unique Subnet Numbers We ve already mentioned it once in this chapter but it s so important that we ll say it again each Ethernet network in your VPN must use a different subnet number We recommend using any of the networks from 192 168 1 to 192 168 255 since these numbers are spe cifically reserved for private use The Master Server needs a Static IP Address Here s the other catch The only way to find someone on the Internet is to know their IP address actually if their host name is registered in the DNS system you can use that but DNS simply converts the host name to an IP address so the result is the same To create a connection between two Nitix powered servers someone needs to act as the Cli ent and someone as the Master server Think of it like a phone call to your ISP you the cli ent need to know their phone number but they the server don t need to know yours With Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 200 TunnelVision TunnelVision you have a similar situation the server side accepting a connection needs a static IP address while the client side can have either a static or a dynamic IP address Only one Nitix powered server usually the computer with the fastest Internet connection at your head office needs to act as the server and have a static IP address All the others can simply
296. other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation soft ware is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibili ties for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 331 We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone under stan
297. otocol A method of transmitting protocols such as IP over a serial link PPP is most often used in dial up modem connections from a home computer to an ISP Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is often used to connect DSL providers Because it is based on two common standards PPP and Ethernet it is easy to integrate into existing networks Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 416 PPTP Protocol Proxy Server RBL Router Routing Routing Table RSA Security Certificate Server Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP ensures secure communications over Virtual Private Networks that use public phone lines A set of rules that govern network exchanges A server that acts as a barrier between an internal network and the Internet Proxy servers can work with firewalls which help keep outside users from gaining access to confidential informa tion A proxy server also allows the caching of web pages for quicker retrieval Realtime Blackhole List A spam blocker that has different levels of spam protection such as Strong or Medium A device that handles the connection between two or more networks The act of directing packets between networks A list of destinations known to the router server that allows user traffic to get to and from its destinations Rivest Shamir Adleman An Internet encryption and authentication system that uses an algorithm developed by Rivest Shamir and Adlema
298. ound Error messages display on a red background Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 269 Log Messages Customizing Message Display The Highlight drop down menu allows you to highlight messages coming from a specific Nitix subsystem such as Disk Manager and Fast Forward making them much easier to see To customize your message log display 1 Select a subsystem from the Highlight drop down menu 2 Select an option from the Priority drop down list Please Note The Priority list customizes what kind of message is highlighted By default only mes sages that show a change in the system display However you can make error messages and debug messages display 3 Click on the Apply button The appropriate messages are highlighted Firewall Log For ICSA firewall compliance Nitix logs requests to send traffic through the firewall Please see Chapter 22 Firewall Services for more information on Nitix s firewall The following firewall information is logged All permitted inbound access requests from public network clients that use a service iden tified in the security policy hosted on the Nitix powered server itself or on a private or service network server All permitted outbound access requests from private and service network clients that use a service identified in the security policy on a public network server All access requests from private service and public network clients to traverse the Nitix firewall t
299. pd NET INTEGRATION TECHNOLOGIES INC Autonomic Linux based Server Operating System User Manual Version 4 0 601 0001 12 This device complies with IEC60950 1999 3 Edition CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 UL 60950 2000 3 Edition Federal Communications Commission KCC Compliance Information Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for either Class A or Class B digital devices refer to Requirements Compliance pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver 1s connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Requireme
300. pecify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For soft ware which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WAR RANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 345 PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIA
301. peed links are down and you need to use a dial up connection See Chapter 23 Domain Name Services for more information e NetIntelligence No human intervention is required to activate and deactivate Internet services when they fail or are restored NetIntelligence automatically takes care of these situations Full automation You do not have to reconfigure any client workstations on your local network in order to take advantage of Double Vision DoubleVision is fully automated and managed by the server Modem Connections Since modems are normally much slower than other Internet connections you probably do not want to use a modem as your primary connection Instead you can configure your modem as a last resort option meaning that your modem will only connect if one or more of the high speed connections fails If a modem is configured as the primary connection it will connect to the Internet even if high speed connections are available This is useful if you want to test the modem connec tion Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 66 Chapter 7 User amp Team Management Service Integration User and team management is tightly integrated with a number of other Nitix services It is very important that you understand how user and team management relates to these other functions before we start talking about creating editing and deleting users and teams Please read the following section carefully Nitix s ema
302. pending on their target For example you might want email from maill yournetwork com to be sent to Fred your NT server and email from mail2 yournetwork com to be sent to Barney your Unix server To do this your ISP needs to assign you multiple static IP addresses Some ISPs may not offer this service If you have two static IP addresses 207 6 60 1 and 207 6 60 2 and you want the setup we just described you can create one forwarding entry with source 207 6 60 1 port 25 and destination 192 168 1 5 port 25 create another forwarding entry with the source 207 6 60 2 port 25 and desti nation 192 168 1 6 port25 Common Port Numbers Here are a few common port numbers that you can use with FastForward 22 SSH Secure Shell 23 Telnet 25 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 79 Finger 80 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol Web server 110 POP Post Office Protocol 5631 PCAnywhere 443 Web server secure port HTTPS Please Note Some ports cannot be used with FastForward For example port 21 FTP does not work because it uses multiple connections that include both ports 20 and 21 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 246 Fastforward Troubleshooting Fastforward Nitix s WebConfig screen may display the following message An error occurred while Fast Forward tried to bind to one or more of the addresses specified This message may display if e you are trying to forward to por
303. priate user s Edit Action button The Modify Users screen displays Mi autoinstall changeit admin Test E Mail CONVERT TO TEAM E MAIL SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 Choose the Log team in the Join Teams field 4 Click on the Save Changes button 5 Access the team folder on Nitix Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 272 Chapter 30 Network File System What is NFS NFS Network File System is a protocol invented by Sun Microsystems that allows clients using UNIX and similar operating systems to mount file systems from remote servers This chapter is for advanced users that are familiar with UNIX and similar operating systems Please Note Refer to http en tldp org HOWTO NFS HOWTO for more information on NFS Installing and Configuring ugidd If your user ID on the local system is different than your user ID on the Nitix server you will not be able to access mounted directories To avoid this problem 1 Install ugidd an application that provides user name and ID information to NFS on your local system 2 Select File from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The File Server Setup screen displays In the Mapping scheme for NFS field select ugidd Click on the Save Changes button Please Note If you are using NIS Network Information Server or a similar application that provides usernames and IDs to the network you generally do not need ugidd Nit
304. r example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 337 object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s rep utation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Mos
305. r work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a desi
306. rbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated soft ware packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particu lar case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsi bilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it Fo
307. rcise the right to control the distribution of deriva tive or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 333 a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The sour
308. re the file is saved in the Restore file Please Note Selecting all file is the equivalent of performing a full directory restore 6 Click on the Perform Restore button to begin the restore procedure Initiating a Restore from a Net Integrator Control Panel Please Note This can only be done with Net Integrator Mark and Mark II servers All other hardware platforms must initiate a restore from the system s WebConfig menu IMPORTANT Initiate a restore procedure from the control panel only if you want to do a complete system restore See idb Restore Scenarios in this chapter for more information 1 Press the Restore button The display panel shows a 10 second countdown during which you can stop the restore process by pressing the Cancel button After 10 seconds the restore procedure commences and the display panel console shows a progress bar idb Backup Teams Administrators can create a backup team account that will grant all members of the team access to the Backup page in WebConfig and all associated functions Users will have full control over backups and restores without giving them access to other administrator func tions 1 Select User Setup from the menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Main User Setup screen displays 2 Create a team called backup Please Note See Chapter 7 User amp Team Management for instructions on how to create a team 3 Add any users to the backup team that you wa
309. ready sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a spe cial exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally dis tributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a sin gle library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 343 b Give prominent notice with the combined libra
310. receive a message if their mail is blocked Select Medium RBL if you want to block known spam servers Medium RBL blocks most spam mail Select No RBL if you do not want spam protection 11 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the Mail Virus Scanner By default the virus scanner is enabled 12 Indicate whether you want to enable Mail Logging Selecting Yes enables the Mail Logging option which will automatically copy all incoming and outgoing mail Each email that is sent received will include a privacy warning indicating that the email is being logged by the server into a mail archive This warning cannot be edited Amaillog team is created and will appear under Team Setup The archived mail can be accessed through WebMail or IMAP by adding users as members of the maillog team For more information please see Chapter 7 User amp Team Manage ment 13 Enter the number of minutes between remote POP mailbox checks The number in this field specifies how often in minutes the remote mailbox is checked for new emails 14 Enter the name of your mail domain e g example com 15 In the field for SP s SMTP Server enter the server name if your ISP forces you to use a specific SMTP server This will make Nitix deliver to that server rather than directly to the destination servers This is known as a smarthost You should leave this blank whenever possible Enter your ISP login username and password 16 Click o
311. rent folder You can only share and create new folders under team account files or if another user has shared his or her file with you 2 Click the Exchangelt Permissions tab 3 Click the Add button 4 Choose a User from the drop down list with whom you wish to share the information Choose user team OK webmaster Cancel 5 Select a Permission Level to grant to that user from the drop down list 6 To add more than one user at a time click on the Apply button and repeat steps 3 5 Con tinue to the next step 7 Click the OK button Team Access Public Folders are automatically created for every team account on Nitix All members of the team have full Read Write Admin access to the folder To Remove or Change a User s Permissions 1 Right click on the Outlook folder in the Outlook Shortcuts or Folder List and select Prop erties 2 Click on the Exchangelt Permissions tab Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 294 Exchangelt 3 Select the User name Calendar Properties ERU zi x General Home Page AutoArchive Administration Forms Exchangelt Permissions Name Permission hud Read write Admin Read Wiite webmaster Read Permissions Permission level Read Write X 4 Use the Permission Level drop down menu to change the permission or click Remove to remove that user s permissions for that folder To View Information in Public Folders 1 Double click on Publi
312. ribution 3 The name PHP must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this soft ware without prior permission from the PHP Group This does not apply to add on libraries or tools that work in conjunction with PHP In such a case the PHP name may be used to indicate that the product supports PHP 4 The PHP Group may publish revised and or new versions of the license from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once covered code has been published under a particular version of the license you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such covered code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published by the PHP Group No one other than the PHP Group has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this License 5 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes PHP freely available from http www php net 6 The software incorporates the Zend Engine a product of Zend Technologies Ltd Zend The Zend Engine is licensed to the PHP Association pursuant to a grant from Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 381 Zend that can be found at http www php net license ZendGrant for distribution to you under this license agreement only as a part of PHP In the event that you separate the Zend Engine or any portion thereof from the rest of th
313. rious patents and is sold but this agreement does not cover that sale since it may not necessarily be sold as a package with the SOFTWARE This agreement sets forth the terms and conditions of the SOFTWARE LICENSE only 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Customer Customer means the entity or individual that downloads the SOFTWARE 2 GRANT OF LICENSE 2 1 Rights and Limitations of Grant NVIDIA hereby grants Customer the following non exclusive non transferable right to use the SOFTWARE with the following limitations 2 1 1 Rights Customer may install and use one copy of the SOFTWARE on a single com puter and except for making one back up copy of the Software may not otherwise copy the Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 371 SOFTWARE This LICENSE of SOFTWARE may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers 2 1 2 Linux Exception Notwithstanding the foregoing terms of Section 2 1 1 SOFTWARE designed exclusively for use on the Linux operating system may be copied and redistributed provided that the binary files thereof are not modified in any way except for unzipping of compressed files 2 1 3 Limitations No Reverse Engineering Customer may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE nor attempt in any other manner to obtain the source code No Separation of Components The SOFTWARE is licensed as a single product Its compo nent parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer nor oth
314. rivileges Administration priv ileges means that this user will have unrestricted access to all configuration functions of Nitix 8 Indicate whether or not this user will have FTP access to his or her private directory Please Note FTP has to be enabled before the user has FTP access If FTP is enabled in Trusted Hosts Only mode the user can access files from a trusted internal network or from a VPN If FTP is enabled in open mode the user can access files using FTP from anywhere on the Internet 9 Indicate whether or not the user is allowed to establish a remote VPN PPTP or dial in modem connection to the internal network For security reasons most users should not be able to establish a remote connection Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 70 User amp Team Management Please Note VPN services have to be enabled before a user can establish a VPN connection Sim ilarly dial in for a specific modem has to be enabled before a user can establish a dial in connection on that modem See Chapter 21 Remote Access Services for more information 10 If the domain controller is enabled choose a drive that the user s files can be automati cally mounted to when logged into a domain workstation The default drive is X Please Note Be sure to choose a drive that is not already in use For more information see Chapter 10 NT Domain Services 11 Select a Quota Value for this user Please Note For more information see Chapter 9
315. rkgroup name field on the File Server Setup WebConfig screen Click on the OK button The next time you log on the login window will have an addi tional Domain field For Windows XP Professional 1 Install the registry patch http www net itech com support registry patch samba xp domain member reg For information on the latest features available in Samba as a domain controller down load this PDF http www net itech com support docs csamba6 pdf In Windows select Start gt Control Panel The Control Panel window displays On the left menu bar under Control Panel select Classic View if you are currently in Category View Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 109 NT Domain Services 3 Select System from the list The System Properties window displays Click on the Com puter Name tab System Restore Asome Updates Remote Genera Computes Name Hardmase Advanced fj Windes ures the Iohowing rloematon to identity your comu cn the network Comptes deicrpton For example Kitchen Computer ot Mary s Computer Full computer name bestia Work goug WORKGROUP To ute the Network Identification Wizard to jon a Network ID domain and create local user account chek Network 10 To sename ts computer cx join a domain cick Change Change emen 4 Click on the Change button The Computer Name Changes window displays You can change the name and the membership ol the computer Changes may
316. rom the local network and not from the Internet For this to work the master web server also has to be enabled Select No to disable personal webpages Please Note The address for personal home pages is in the following format http server domain username 6 Although the default Webmaster team is created as the administrator of the master web server any team can perform server maintenance tasks If appropriate select another team to maintain the server from the drop down list 7 Enter the email address of the Webmaster the person who is in charge of this web site 8 Enter the appropriate number in the Megabytes of WWW cache field Refer to Web Cach ing in this chapter for more details 9 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 158 Web Services Virtual Web Servers Although virtual web servers allow you to host a number of web sites from the same server these sites appear to outside users as though they are all hosted by different servers In order to configure virtual web servers on the outside interface your ISP has to assign you multiple IP addresses or you have to use name based virtual web sites which use names to distinguish between websites that share a single IP address Every virtual web site has to be associated with a maintenance team which can maintain only one virtual web site This means that for every virtual web site that you create you also have to create a
317. rosoft and Netscape Web Cache An area on your hard disk that is reserved for storing images text and other files that have been viewed on the Internet WebConfig Nitix has a web based configuration system To connect to WebConfig enter http hostname 8043 in the address bar of a web browser For example if your Nitix powered server s host name is thunder enter ht tp thunder 8043 in the address bar See Chapter 3 Connecting to WebConfig for more information WebMail Server A system that allows users to access their email account using any standard web browser Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 419 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 420 A Access Control Lists 90 address book WebMail 146 administrator account creating 37 anonymous FTP server 177 Apache Public License 305 307 319 Artistic License 315 Automated Drive Mapping 113 B Backup 179 BSD License 321 347 357 359 361 395 C Client Access Licenses 63 components of Net Integrator 11 configuration of Net Integrator 49 Configuring 180 282 D data backup idb intelligent disk backup 179 data restore idb intelligent disk backup 183 DHCP server 20 24 disk management 249 disk configuration 249 hard disk failure 254 idb 249 installing a new hard drive 255 reconfiguration of disks 250 status messages 252 SystemER 254 Disk Quotas 97 exceeding limit 99 setting user quotas 98 setting values 97 DNS 227 domain registrars 229 dynamic DNS
318. rowser to change it back If something goes wrong with these settings you have to use the control panel on the front of the server to change them back Please Note If you intend to use TunnelVision discussed in Chapter 19 every network in each office location that will be connected through a VPN must have a separate network subnet If Nitix servers in various locations auto configure their local network interfaces to the same subnet you will have to change your subnet number and IP address to a different value Refer to Reconfiguring Network Devices in this chapter for information on how to do that Advanced Network Settings screen To access the Advanced Network Settings screen 1 Select Local from the Network Status menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Local Network Options screen displays Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 51 Configuring Nitix 2 Select the Advanced option at the bottom of the screen The Advanced Network Settings screen displays NETWORK DEVICES Device IP Address Netmask Mode Trust Action Default via 192 168 12 1 on eth0 ADD NEW ROUTE HOME Network Devices The following list describes the Network Devices section of the screen Device lists the network interfaces installed on the Nitix powered server Eth0 should be connected to your LAN Eth1 Eth2 and PPPO should be connected to the Internet IP Address lists the IP addresses to the
319. rrently connected to Nitix and utilizing file services The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is dis abled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service FTP Server Displays the status of FTP services The number of sessions displayed represents the number of active FTP downloads currently in progress The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if ser vice is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service MySQL Server Displays the status of MySQL services The number of sessions displayed represents the number of active users currently connected to Nitix and utilizing MySQL data base services The CPU utilization bar graph indicates how much processor time is being used by this service The status light is gray if service is disabled bright green if service is operational yellow if service is utilized heavily and red if there is a problem with the service Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 45 Connecting to WebConfig SMTP Server Displays the status of SMTP services The number of sessions displayed represents the number of emails being transferred by this server normally none The CPU utili zation
320. rse engelschall com gt THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY RALF S ENGELSCHALL AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL RALF S ENGELSCHALL OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI RECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 379 WISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 380 Appendix Z The PHP License version 2 02 Version 2 02 Copyright 1999 2002 The PHP Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification is permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the dist
321. rver 1 You will need to download an executable file called pwdump2 The program is freely available online and can be found at various locations on the Internet Here is one http razor bindview com tools desc pwdump2_readme html 2 Download the file called pwdump2 zip and unzip the contents to their own folder For example extract the contents to a folder called pwdump2 on your C drive 3 Click on the Start menu and choose Run J New Office Document Open Office Document 9 Windows Update 9t Winzip G Launch RealOne Player F Programs ey Documents amp Settings I z CN Search D R 9 Help 3 T Shut Down INe iul D GJ Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 72 User amp Team Management 4 Enter cmd and click OK Ts 08s Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open Ef zi CNN 5 Type cd pwdump2 and hit Enter This will change the directory to the folder you cre ated on your C drive that contains the contents to the file pwdump2 zip INNT System32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows 2666 Version 5 88 2195 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2666 Microsoft Corp G gt cd pwdump2 6 Type pwdump2 gt list txt and hit Enter This will run the file called pwdump2 exe and generate a text file called list txt in the same folder WINNT System32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows 2868 Version 5
322. rver No one can access secure web pages on this server Selecting No also means that you cannot access WebMail 4 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the MySQL database server MySQL is an advanced feature for users that are familiar with SQL Structured Query Language Refer to Chapter 27 MySQL Server for more information Selecting Yes enables the MySQL server and allows users on the internal network to access personal databases and the databases of any teams that they belong to WebMail uses the MySQL database server to store user preferences as such the server has to be turned on for WebMail to work Selecting No disables the MySQL server Users will not have access to personal or team databases This is the default setting Please Note User and team databases are automatically created when user and team accounts are set up MySQL databases can be used to store dynamic web page data for services such as on line catalogues and stores Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 157 Web Services 5 Indicate whether or not you want to serve personal home pages from the WWW subdirec tory located in each user s personal network directory You can choose to serve web pages to users on your network or to the entire Internet Select Yes to allow personal pages to be viewed from anywhere For this to work the master web server also has to be enabled Select Only Trusted Hosts to allow personal pages to be viewed only f
323. ry of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compli ance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However noth ing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modify ing or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your accep tance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not
324. s Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 260 MySQL Server Editing Database Tables 1 To edit a database table log in to phpMyAdmin and select the appropriate table from the menu on the left hand side of the screen The following screen displays e Database John Table AddressBook running on localhost Home Structure Browse SOL Search Insert Export Operations Empty Drop John 1 Field Type Attributes Null Default Extra Action jam Name varchar 20 No a mw u ud gm m AddressBook E mail varchar 20 No a w ug sm E Phone varchar 13 No ia w uus m tL Check All Uncheck All With selected AM Please Note This screen has other options not shown in this image 2 Click on the Change icon in the Action section of the screen 3 On the screen that displays you can edit the following Field Type Length Values Attributes Null Default and Extra Change the entry as appropriate 4 Click on the Save button Deleting Database Tables 1 To delete a database table log in to phpMyAdmin and select the appropriate table from the menu on the left hand side of the screen The following screen displays Run Database John Table AddressBook running on localhost Home Kae Structure Browse SOL Search Insert Export Operations Empty Drop John 1 Field Type Attributes Null Default Extra Action oh Name varchar 20 No Arnona m m AddressBook E mail varchar 20 No Arnona Phone
325. s requested access to a specific website a notice displays in the Content Filtering Requests section of the screen To accept this request 1 Click on the Choose Now button The following screen displays CONTENT FILTERING REQUESTS Web site Request made by Action e GO BACK _ e REFRESH 2 To accept a request click on the Accept Action button The Web Filtering screen re dis plays and the site displays in the Permitted Web Sites list Please Note The administrator can include any subsection of the domain If www red blue org is requested the admin can add www red blue org red blue org or blue org Any sites ending with that domain are permitted for example if the administrator added red blue org then green red blue org would be allowed but violet blue org would not be allowed Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 171 Web Filtering Denying Access Requests If a user has requested access to a specific website a notice displays in the Content Filtering Requests section of the screen To deny this request 1 Click on the Choose Now button The following screen displays CONTENT FILTERING REQUESTS Web site Request made by Action E GO BACK REFRESH 2 To deny a request click on the Delete Action button The Web Filtering screen re dis plays and the site no longer displays in the Requests section of the screen Please Note Once a website has been denied access by the administr
326. s to block applications such as MSN Messenger Yahoo Messenger Kaza Morpheus etc Firewall Log Please see Chapter 29 Log Messages for information on Firewall logs Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 225 Firewall Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 226 ET Domain Name Services What is DNS DNS is the protocol used to convert Internet domain names into IP addresses If DNS is configured users can access information on the local network and the Internet using domain names instead of specific IP addresses Please Note Configuring DNS services can be complicated because it often requires dealing with out side organizations called Domain Registrars If you are uncertain about issues related to DNS ask your ISP to help you DNS Services Nitix runs two different kinds of DNS services DNS Lookup and Caching Server This server converts domain names such www yahoo com into IP addresses and then sends the IP addresses to your browser Nitix runs the DNS lookup and caching server on your local network and blocks connections to the lookup server from the Internet There are no special options to configure the DNS lookup and caching server e DNS Publishing Server This server adds names for your own network such as www example com into the global DNS system so that people can find your IP address to access your web site or to send you email The DNS Publishing Server is quite complicated The rest
327. shed under a particular version of the license you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such covered code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published by Zend Technologies Ltd No one other than Zend Technologies Ltd has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this License 5 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes the Zend Engine freely available at http www zend com 6 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the fol lowing acknowledgment The Zend Engine is freely available at http www zend com Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 407 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ZEND TECHNOLOGIES LTD AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL ZEND TECH NOLOGIES LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPE CIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIA BILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF
328. sswor ee Actas Domain Controller Yes Jof Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles Domain Controller Admin password username is root 1 Domain Controller Re enter admin password i PERMISSIONS SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 2 Enter the domain name in the Windows workgroup domain box 3 Ensure that the Act as Domain Member is enabled by selecting Yes 4 Enter your Domain Member Admin username this is your Windows NT administrator name 5 Enter your Domain Member Admin password this is your Windows NT administrator password Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly 6 Click on the Save Changes button Please Note Ensure that you have disabled Act as Domain Controller and Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 102 NT Domain Services What is a Domain Controller A domain controller provides authentication services to the rest of the computers on the net work It stores user account and security information in a central database for one domain When a user logs on to a computer that is part of the domain the domain controller authenti cates the username and password against the information in the directory database Nitix can serve as a Windows domain controller for all the computers running Windows on the network When this function is enabled the Windows file server is set up as a domain controller and a doma
329. t MD5 Digest SHAI HTML Parser IO stringy Libnet libww perl MailTools MIME Base64 MIME tools Net DNS Perl PAM section 4a Time HiRes Unicode IMAPUtf7 Unicode String ppp This software was developed by the Australian National Univer sity Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 297 BSD License Caldera Systems License Carnegie Mellon University Dazuko License D J Bernstein s DJBDNS License D J Bernstein s General License D J Bernstein s qmail License Eric Rosenquist License GNU General Public License v 2 Berkeley DB clause 3 Netatalk clause 3 NetKit FTP clause 3 portmapper clause 3 ppp clause 3 quota tools clause 3 tcpdump clause 3 traceroute clause 3 vacation clause 3 OpenSLP ppp This Software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University Dazuko djbdns ucspi tcp ezmlm dot forward fastforward qmail ppp This license was developed by Eric Rosenquist APC UPS Daemon section 3b BusyBox section 3b checkpassword pam section 3b Chrony section 3b Courier IMAP section 3b Cramfs section 3b Dazuko section 3b e3 section 3b Generate a ROMFS file system section 3b GHorde IMP section 3b Horde Kronoloith section 3b Horde Mnemo section 3b NU Findutils section 3b Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 298 Horde Nag section 3b Horde Turba section 3b IPROUTE2 section 3b ITE IT8212 RAID Controller Device Dr
330. t GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Pub lic License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain desig nated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free pro grams must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is th
331. t for a dial up connection to be re established 10 Indicate whether or not you want your Nitix powered server to emulate Windows Dial up Networking Please Note Some Internet providers are setup to work only with Windows dial up clients If you have problems establishing dial up connection try enabling this option 11 Indicate whether or not users will be able to establish a remote dial in modem connection to the internal network Please Note A user s VPN PPTP and Dial In access has to be enabled before they can establish a remote connection See Creating Users in Chapter 7 User amp Team Management for more informa tion 12 Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 60 Configuring Nitix Configuring a DSL Connection PPPoE 1 Select Dial up from the Network Status menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The Dial up Networking Setup screen displays Click on the Action button in the appropriate ADSL row eth or eth2 only The ADSL Dialer Options screen displays salastresot QNo SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Enter the Internet account username provided by your ISP Enter the account password provided by your ISP Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly If the passwords do not match you will be asked to re enter your password in both fields Optional Enter your gateway IP address Leave this blank if you don t know the ad
332. te are automatically set up by Nitix Click the Add DNS button The DNS Add screen displays DNS ADD SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Enter a name for the entry Select the entry type Enter the target IP address in the Value field Click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 232 Domain Name Services Editing an Existing DNS Entry 1 Select DNS from the Server Setup menu The DNS List screen displays Please Note To edit your private DNS entries click the Private Entries button 2 Click on the entry s Edit Action button The DNS Edit screen displays SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES 3 Make the appropriate changes and click on the Save Changes button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 233 Domain Name Services Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 234 er Workstation Viewer What is the Workstation Viewer The Workstation Viewer is a Nitix subsystem that can list the workstations and servers that are connected through the local network or a VPN The Workstations screen tells you which computers are on the network what their names and IP addresses are and who is logged on If a workstation can be administered remotely using Virtual Network Computing described in the next section the remote administration program can be accessed from WebConfig Accessing the Workstation Viewer 1 Select Workstations from the Network Setup menu on the
333. te corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the require ment to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 351 However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library
334. team that will maintain it If this site is maintained by users on the local net work they can be made members of the maintenance team If the site is maintained by out side users they will have to use FTP to access to the web site directory If they have an account on the server they can use their own login name and password If they do not have an account on the network they have to use the team name and password Creating a New Virtual Web Server 1 Select WWW from the Server Setup menu on the left side of any WebConfig screen The WWW Setup screen displays WWW SETUP S Dynamic Enable WWW server Enable secure WWW server Enable MySQL Server Enable users personal home pages Choose a team to act as webmaster Web Proxy port 0 to let Nitix HW choose i eae ee hd 0 to disable amp VIRTUAL DOMAINS SSL CERTIFICATE SAVE CHANGES CANCEL CHANGES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 159 Web Services 2 Click on the Virtual Domains button The Virtual Domains screen displays showing all existing virtual domains VIRTUAL DOMAINS Only Trusted Hosts Allow users personal home pages Action Hostname IP Address Webmaster Team No virtual W ADD SERVER HOME T 3 Click on the Add Server button The New Virtual Domain screen displays NEW VIRTUAL DOMAIN Hostname of Virtual WWW Server IP Address of Virtual
335. tech com products features connectivity firewall php Click on the firewall whitepaper pdf link at the bottom of the page The paper will launch in Adobe Acrobat Reader ICSA Firewall Security Compliance Starting with Nitix version 3 71 Nitix incorporates features to be ICSA compliant The ICSA Labs test firewall products against a standard and evolving set of criteria Their Fire wall Certification Criteria are composed of both functional and assurance requirements and the criteria requirements define an industry accepted standard that all products claiming to have firewalling capabilities must attain Traffic Denied Inbound The firewall denies all inbound network traffic that is not for Remote administration Private network hosts Service network hosts The firewall itself Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 223 Firewall Services Traffic Permitted Inbound The firewall supports access requests for the following services if enabled see Chapter 29 Log Messages for which firewall request information is logged FTP Active and Passive Mode HTTP HTTPS SMTP Traffic Permitted Outbound Nitix permits the following protocols through the firewall Telnet TCP 23 To access resources on a Unix Linux computer FTP TCP 20 21 To copy files between computers HTTP TCP 80 To make web pages available over the Internet HTTPS TCP 443 To make secure web pages available over the Internet SMT
336. ters allow you to automati cally move messages to certain folders or delete messages from your inbox Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 151 WebMail Creating a Rule 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Options button Then click on the Filters button The Filters screen displays Edit your filter rules Apply filter rules upon logging on Apply filter rules when mailbox is refreshed Display message when filters have been applied Undo Changes Return to Options 2 Click on Edit your filter rules The following screen displays Field To Cc From Subject Body Text eee Action delete message C move message to selectfolder Create Reset Cancel 3 Select the appropriate field 4 Enter the appropriate text 5 Select an action Place a check in the delete message box if you want mail that fits the tule to be deleted Place a check in the move message box and select a folder if you want mail that fits the rule to be moved to a specific folder 6 Click on the Create button 7 The new rule displays in the Filter Rules section of the screen 8 Click on the Apply All Rules button Your inbox displays As an example if you selected From entered the text johndoe and selected delete message all messages from johndoe will be sent directly to your trash folder Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 152 WebMail Blacklisting a Sender The Blacklist function allows you to
337. the MySQL server to store user preference information the MySQL server has to be enabled for WebMail to work properly Please Note User and team databases are automatically created when user and team accounts are set up What is phpMyAdmin phpMyAdmin is a program that is used to administer MySQL databases phpMyAdmin provides a user interface for MySQL meaning that users can take advantage of MySQL data bases even if they are not familiar with SQL Users can set up a database in phpMyAdmin and use Microsoft Access to access and manage the database This is most often done for simple databases such as address books OR PHP or Perl scripts to access and manage the database This is most often done for dynamic web pages which will be discussed later on in this chapter Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 257 MySQL Server Managing Databases in phpMyAdmin Creating Database Tables As an example we are going to show you how to create a simple address book in phpMyAdmin Later we will show you how to manage the database in Microsoft Access 1 Open an Internet browser on your workstation Newer versions of Netscape or Microsoft browsers are recommended 2 Read the IP address on your Nitix powered server s console For demonstration pur poses we will use the following address 192 168 0 1 3 Enter https 192 168 0 1 mysql into the browser s address bar Press Enter on your keyboard Enter your username a
338. the combination of Origi nal Code and any previous Modifications and or any respective portions thereof When code is released as a series of files a Modification is a any addition to or deletion from the con tents of a file containing Covered Code and or b any new file or other representation of computer program statements that contains any part of Covered Code 1 7 Original Code means a the Source Code of a program or other work as originally made available by Apple under this License including the Source Code of any updates or upgrades to such programs or works made available by Apple under this License and that has been expressly identified by Apple as such in the header file s of such work and b the object code compiled from such Source Code and originally made available by Apple under this License 1 8 Source Code means the human readable form of a program or other work that is suit able for making modifications to it including all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files scripts used to control compilation and installation of an executable object code 1 9 You or Your means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under this License For legal entities You or Your includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You where control means a the power director indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by con
339. the previous version will start instead If you choose not to confirm your download and a power loss or reboot occurs the server will revert back to the last used operating system Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 192 Software Update 9 To revert back to the old version select Software Update from the WebConfig menu Click on the Activate link in the Versions already installed section of the screen Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 193 Software Update Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 194 crane TunnelVision Private Networks In the past private networks were created by using routers to connect different office loca tions through dedicated phone lines This procedure is often called a wide area network WAN Conventional private networks can be illustrated like this N Branch Office 2 1 958 LI T d Branch 7 Office p i p w ba E Moy fe RE Head Office L Phone Line Branch Eu Office x N x PA N Nu n So 4 Branch Office Branch Office S J Virtual Private Networks Tunnel Vision allows you to create a virtual private network VPN using the Internet instead of a WAN and dedicated phone lines for server to server or network to network connections A VPN can be illustrated this way
340. this might still sound abstract and confusing Here are a few common examples 1 Your internal network has an email server called Fred running Windows NT The address of the server is 192 168 1 5 Set the source to This Server port 25 which is the SMTP port and the destination to 192 168 1 5 port 25 Now people can send email to your Nitix powered server s static IP address and it will get forwarded to your mail server If Fred has a DNS server on port 53 you can forward This Server port 53 to 192 168 1 5 port 53 That way people on the Internet can look up hostnames that belong to your local network You can make WebConfig accessible from the outside world so that Net Integration Technologies technical support can get into your Nitix powered server and help you with problems Nitix s port 80 is already in use for the company web server so we ll use port 8 as the source WebConfig uses Port 8043 and if the destination IP is 192 168 1 1 the com plete destination address is 192 168 1 1 port 8043 To access WebConfig from the outside we would need to use a special address http www yournetwork com 81 Here s what FastForward looks like 1f you choose all three of these settings FAST FORWARD Net Integr Net Integr ADD NEW FORWARD HOME Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 245 Fastforward Multiple Static IP Addresses In certain cases you will want FastForward to treat connections differently de
341. time if you remove an idb disk from the Nitix powered server the display panel con sole will continue to show idb HotSwap OK until one of these events occurs You manually start a backup restore You click on the Update Disk Status link in WebConfig or The next scheduled backup begins After which Nitix will detect that there is no idb disk installed and change the display panel console message to No Backup Disk Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 189 Backup amp Restore Swapping idb Hard Disks with Hot Swap 1 Verify that the display panel console says idb HotSwap OK Please Note idb Hot Swapping is only available on certain hardware platforms 2 Remove the idb disk from the server 3 Insert the new idb disk into the drive Please Note Nitix will detect the new idb disk during either its next scheduled backup or if you log in to WebConfig and click the Update Disk Status link Swapping idb Hard Disks without Hot Swap 1 Turn off the main power Remove the disk from the server Slide the new hard disk into the drive as far as you can keeping the handle horizontal Insert the new idb disk into the drive Turn the main power back on o mo PF LY N Press the power button Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 190 Chapter 18 Software Update Software Updates Periodically Nitix contacts Net Integration Technologies distribution servers through its Internet connection and r
342. tion Others Other items may appear on the System Status Screen depending on the addition of any optional software modules Please refer to the appropriate software documenta tion for the description of the status indicators Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 46 Connecting to WebConfig Notices Box In most cases when you change a service option in WebConfig and click Save As Nitix will display a list of major actions that are happening in the background in a Notices box at the top of that sub service screen Failure notices will also appear in the Notices box For example when you create a new user a Notices box similar to the following will display showing all of the actions Nitix has taken in setting up that user NOTICES Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 47 Connecting to WebConfig Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 48 Chapter 4 Configuring Nitix Proceeding with Configuration You are ready to proceed with the system configuration once you have configured your workstation to use TCP IP created an Administrator account logged in and connected to WebConfig configured your disks please see Chapter 26 Disk Management for details on configuring your disks IMPORTANT Some Nitix services will not be enabled unless hard disks are configured through the Web Config menu For first time disk configuration do not use the Disk Install option on the Console menu For more information on con
343. tions in binary form must reproduce the above copy right notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University of Chicago nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO AND CON TRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS CLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO OR CONTRIBU TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 397 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 398 Appendix Al University of Michigan License Copyright Regents of The University of Michigan All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any p
344. tname SS Use default gateway on this link yes Only as last resort SAVE CHANGES amp CANCEL CHANGES Optional Enter a new IP address in the format 192 168 12 10 Optional Enter a new network mask in the format 255 255 255 0 Optional Indicate whether or not to trust computers on this network 9 gu m co Optional Indicate whether or not you want Nitix to automatically choose an IP address and network mask The default setting is Yes meaning that Nitix automatically selects an IP address and network mask The default setting is changed to No and autoconfiguration is disabled if you entered a new IP address or a new network mask and clicked on the Save Changes button Please Note Eth0 should never be set to choose automatically Once an IP has been chosen the inter face should have its option forced not automatic unless you are running a separate DHCP server on the local network 7 Optional If your DHCP server 1 e your cable modem provider specified that you need a DHCP Client ID when setting up your network enter it here 8 Optional Indicate whether or not you want Nitix to use this link as the default gateway If this is set to Yes Nitix will create a default route to the network through this interface at the highest priority level so this link will be used by default for incoming and outgoing traffic Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 53 Configuring Nitix
345. to change your WebMail settings 3 Follow the instructions on the screen that displays 4 Click on the Save Options button to save your changes and return to the Options screen Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 141 WebMail Composing an Email Message 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Compose button The Compose screen displays Message Composition Wed Dec 11 11 39 10 2002 Cancel Message Identity cho netitech com Default Identity To De Subject Options a amp a Address Book Expand Names Special Characters M Save a copy in sent mail Request a Return Receipt attachment Browse Message text Send Message Save Draft Cancel Message 2 Enter the email address of the recipient s in the 70 field If the recipient is in your address book you can enter a partial name e g john instead of j onndoe exam ple com 3 Enter the email address es of those you wish to receive a copy of this email in the Cc Carbon Copy field 4 Ifyou want to send someone a copy of this email without the knowledge of the other recipients enter their email address in the Bcc Blind Carbon Copy field 5 Enter the subject of the email in the Subject field 6 Ifyou entered a partial name in the 70 field you can click on the Expand Names button to view the recipient s full name and email address 7 To insert any special characters into your message click on the Special Characters but ton
346. to save the quota value for that user Quota Limit All Disk Quota limits on Nitix are enforced or hard limits This means that administrators can only define an absolute maximum and not a soft limit for warnings to users When a user s quota limit is reached the system will prevent that user from using any more space on Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 99 Disk Quotas the hard disks by preventing them from creating new files editing existing files receiving emails etc User accounts with a quota over the limit will e not be permitted to write anymore to the disk until having cleared some space beunable to login to WebMail notreceive any new email Administrators will seea yellow warning light in the Quota section on the System Status screen and it will tell you that there are users over their quota notice the user s Disk Space Used column on theUser Setup screen says something similar to 4 1 MB 1 5 MB 274 seea list user s over their quota on the Quota Setup screen receive an Email Report when the server s disks reach 90 full another notice will not be sent unless the disk space drops below 85 usage and then rises again above 9094 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 100 Grantor NT Domain Services What is a Windows NT Domain Member Nitix can become a member of a Windows NT domain enabling Nitix to authenticate users using a pre existing Windows NT domain controller
347. tract or other wise or b ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Permitted Uses Conditions amp Restrictions Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Apple hereby grants You effective on the date You accept this License and down load the Original Code a world wide royalty free non exclusive license to the extent of Apple s Applicable Patent Rights and copyrights covering the Original Code to do the fol lowing 2 1 Unmodified Code You may use reproduce display perform internally distribute within Your organization and Externally Deploy verbatim unmodified copies of the Original Code for commercial or non commercial purposes provided that in each instance Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 308 a You must retain and reproduce in all copies of Original Code the copyright and other pro prietary notices and disclaimers of Apple as they appear in the Original Code and keep intact all notices in the Original Code that refer to this License and b You must include a copy of this License with every copy of Source Code of Covered Code and documentation You distribute or Externally Deploy and You may not offer or impose any terms on such Source Code that alter or restrict this License or the recipients rights hereunder except as permitted under Section 6 2 2 Modified Code You may modify Covered Code and use reproduce display perfor
348. ts that are already being used by your Nitix pow ered server port 80 for example FastForward has more than one entry trying to use the same source port and address You cannot have more than one FastForward entry attached to the same source If you see this message turn off the server that is already using the port For example to for ward port 80 the port used for web services to another address you would first have to shut off the web server on Nitix The log message viewer explained in Chapter 29 Log Messages shows which Fast For ward entries did and did not work Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 247 Fastforward Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 248 Chapter 26 Disk Management IMPORTANT Some Nitix services will not be enabled unless hard disks are configured through the WebConfig menu See the section on Configuring you disks below for more information IMPORTANT For first time disk configuration do not use the Disk Install option on the Console menu Disk Configuration idb and RAID Please Note In order to take advantage of RAID you must have Nitix s Software RAID Technology Soft ware RAID Technology comes standard with the Nitix Premium Edition RAID Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks is a system of backing up information that reduces risk by saving data on two or more drives If one drive fails your data is still safely stored on another drive Although you do not n
349. tten by Eric Young strace Netatalk Simplified Wrapper and Interface Generator Simplified Wrapper and Interface Generator Netatalk OpenLDAP University of Washington IMAP GNU Public License v2 Zend Engine The Zend Engine is freely available at http www zend com Ppp Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 301 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 302 ern Adrian Sun License Copyright Adrian Sun asun cobalt com All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in sup porting documentation This software is supplied as is without expressed or implied warran ties of any kind Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 303 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 304 Appendix C Apache Public License Copyright 1995 1999 The Apache Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following condition are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of con ditions and the following disclaimer in t
350. tup Net Integrator Connecting Ethernet Ports I and 2 Ethernet ports and 2 LAN 2 and LAN 3 on the Micro are used to connect to the Internet or to other segments of your LAN Use an Ethernet cable to connect to your high speed Internet routing device Some devices may require the use of a cross over cable that is normally sup plied with the device Left Mark I Mark II If you are using your Net Integrator as a workgroup server without a direct connection to the Internet it is possible to use Ethernet ports and 2 LAN 2 and LAN 3 on the Micro to con nect to other segments of the LAN This is typically done to improve network throughputs when large numbers of users are connected to Net Integrator Please Note Secondary segments must be physically separate from the primary network segment con nected to the Ethernet 0 port LAN1 You cannot connect all Ethernet ports to the same segment in order to improve network throughput Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 17 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator Connecting an External Dial up Modem 1 Connect the cable included with your own external dial up modem to the Serial port on the back of your Net Integrator a a m i fe IS IE sy mnm BERBER Ueeee a a a E iE Gu E IE r m F BEBBRREN m Mark I Mark II Micro 2 Connect one end of the standard telephone cable to the external modem and connect the other end to your telephone w
351. twork Neighborhood or on Macintosh s AppleShare drive If NFS is enabled UNIX and similar systems can use the path export home teamname Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 67 User amp Team Management to access this directory For example the path for a team named sales would be export home sales e a WWW directory is created within the team directory Any file stored in this directory is automatically published on the team s web page an FTP account which points directly to the team directory is created for the team If a team member logs into the FTP server using the proper team name and password they can access the files in the team directory e an email distribution account is created for members of the team Team email can be accessed through either POP3 or IMAP mailboxes Emails received by the team email account may be set to be automatically forwarded to all members of the team Please Note All Nitix user and team accounts with a password require a Nitix CAL Users who do not need to access Nitix services such as email file print and FTP services do not require a CAL Nitix CALs are not required for team accounts without a password team members can still access team data services using their personal user account passwords One additional free Nitix CAL is allocated for a Nitix administrator See Chapter 5 Client Access Licenses for more information Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 68 User amp T
352. ubject to this License Apple may at its sole discretion choose to license such Apple Modifications under this License or on different terms from those contained in this License or may choose not to license them at all 12 Termination 12 1 Termination This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate a automatically without notice from Apple if You fail to comply with any term s of this License and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of such breach b immediately in the event of the circumstances described in Section 13 5 b or c automatically without notice from Apple if You at any time during the term of this License commence an action for patent infringement against Apple provided that Apple did not first commence an action for patent infringement against You in that instance 12 2 Effect of Termination Upon termination You agree to immediately stop any further use reproduction modification sublicensing and distribution of the Covered Code All sub licenses to the Covered Code which have been properly granted prior to termination shall survive any termination of this License Provisions which by their nature should remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive including but not limited to Sec tions 3 5 8 9 10 11 12 2 and 13 No party will be liable to any other for compensation indemnity or damages of any sort solely as a result of terminating this Licens
353. ubnet number you are using and the fourth part identifies an individual computer on the network In special circumstances however you can use any sub net number at all the first three parts of the IP address The important thing is that the Nitix powered server and the computers on the local network have the same subnet number and unique IP addresses Network Address Translation NAT When you communicate with other computers on the Internet Nitix uses network address translation NAT to give each connection a valid unique IP address that doesn t conflict with other networks But for a VPN we don t want Nitix to use NAT because then only two addresses will be vis ible Nitix server 1 and Nitix server 2 Instead Nitix should pass addresses on each net work through to the other network unchanged For this to happen you need to assign different subnet numbers to each Ethernet network involved in the VPN For example use 192 168 1 for Network 1 and 192 168 2 for Net work 2 That means each computer on Network 1 has an address starting with 192 168 1 and each computer on Network 2 has an address starting with 192 168 2 The Steel Pipe To summarize Network 1 is connected to the Internet through Nitix server 1 and has the subnet number 192 168 1 Network 2 is connected to the Internet through Nitix server 2 and has the subnet number 192 168 2 Gateway settings work like this a computer on your Ethernet send pac
354. ude a prominent notice in the code itself as well as in related documentation stating that Source Code of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License with information on how and where to obtain such Source Code 2 4 Third Party Rights You expressly acknowledge and agree that although Apple and each Contributor grants the licenses to their respective portions of the Covered Code set forth herein no assurances are provided by Apple or any Contributor that the Covered Code does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity Apple and each Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 309 Contributor disclaim any liability to You for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder You hereby assume sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed if any For example if a third party patent license is required to allow You to distribute the Covered Code it is Your responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Covered Code 3 Your Grants In consideration of and as a condition to the licenses granted to You under this License You hereby grant to any person or entity receiving or distributing Covered Code under this License a non exclusive royalty free perpetual irrevocable license under Your Applicable Patent Rights and other
355. urpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in support ing documentation and that the name of The University of Michigan not be used in advertis ing or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission This software is supplied as is without expressed or implied warranties of any kind Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 399 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 400 Appendix AJ University of Utah and the Regents of the University of California License Copyright The University of Utah and the Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted without written agreement and without license or royalty fees to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose pro vided that 1 The above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of the source code and 2 redistributions including binaries reproduces these notices in the support ing documentation Substantial modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here provided that the new terms are clearly indicated in all files where they apply IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA THE UNIVERSITY OF UTAH OR DISTR
356. ut of the webmaster s WWW directory In addition WWW server logs are written in the webmaster s directory Selecting No disables the server No one can access web pages on this server Selecting Dynamic Redirect enables the redirection of web connections Dynamic redirection can be employed to circumvent blocked HTTP WWW ports If this option is chosen all WWW requests directed at Nitix will be handled by a dynamic DNS server which will automatically redirect them to a different port on the Nitix powered server This will be almost transparent for clients who will only notice that the hostname and port have changed slightly For Dynamic Redi rect to work you must enable Dynamic DNS see Chapter 23 Domain Name Ser vices 3 Indicate whether or not you want to enable the secure WWW server Selecting Yes enables the secure web server and allows users on the internal net work and users on the Internet to access secure web pages on this server If enabled the WWW server will serve pages out of the webmaster s WWW direc tory In addition WWW server logs are written in the webmaster s directory Selecting Only Trusted Hosts enables the secure web server and allows users on the internal network to access secure web pages on this server If enabled the WWW server will serve pages out of the webmaster s WWW directory In addi tion WWW server logs are written in the webmaster s directory Selecting No disables the secure web se
357. varchar 13 No id w uds t Check All Uncheck All With selected Aw Please Note This screen has other options not shown in this image 2 Click on the Drop icon at the top of the screen Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 261 MySQL Server 3 In the window that displays click on the Yes button Setting up Windows for MySQL Access Instead of using phpMyAdmin you can use Microsoft Access to access and manage database tables We are still using the example of an address book 1 BO mo o You first have to download MySQL ODBC Open Database Connectivity Go to http www mysql com downloads api myodbc html On the screen that displays click on the link for the most recent stable release Please Note Always download the most recent stable release For this example we downloaded MyODBC 2 50 From the Windows Downloads section of the screen that displays click on the Download link for Windows 95 98 Me systems On the screen that displays select the nearest server to download from In the window that displays select Save to save MyODBC to your desktop Double click the icon on your desktop Extract the zip file to a directory called myodbc Double click on the myodbc folder that you created in the previous step Double click on Setup exe The Microsoft ODBC Setup screen displays Click on the Continue button Select MySQL from the Available ODBC Drivers list Click on the OK button
358. venue in the state and federal courts within that District with respect to this License The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded 13 7 Entire Agreement Governing Law This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of California except that body of California law concerning conflicts of law Where You are located in the province of Quebec Canada the following clause applies The parties hereby confirm that they have requested that this License and all related documents be drafted in English Les parties ont exige que le present contrat et tous les documents connexes soient rediges en anglais EXHIBIT A Portions Copyright 1999 2003 Apple Computer Inc All Rights Reserved This file contains Original Code and or Modifications of Original Code as defined in and that are subject to the Apple Public Source License Version 2 0 the License You may not use this file except in compliance with the License Please obtain a copy of the License at http www opensource apple com apsl and read it before using this file The Original Code and all software distributed under the License are distributed on an AS IS basis WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND APPLE HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL SUCH WARRANTIES INCLUDING
359. ver noth ing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modify ing or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your accep tance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 334 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simul taneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free r
360. very month s C Yearly Recurs every j year s Yearly Recurs the first day Aon the same month Regenerate new task C day s z after each task is completed No end date Bee NUT End after 10 occurences C endby 4 E June 20043 Patt Select the appropriate field Enter the appropriate text Click on the Save Changes button Your list of tasks will appear D on To edit your tasks click on the List Tasks button Place a check next to any tasks that you want to edit then select an action from the pull down menu Complete Tasks Delete Tasks Set Task Priority Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 150 WebMail Notes 1 From the Main WebMail Menu click on the Notes button Any notes that you have will display Note Details Categories Marketing Modify Note Delete Note Back to Notepad Pick up brochures from printer Modify Note Delete Note Back to Notepad 2 To adda new note click on the New Note button The following screen displays Adding A New Note Note Text fidd new memo note here Categories Business Color Blue z unde Changes 3 Enter the appropriate text 4 Click on the Save Note button Your list of notes will appear 5 To delete your notes click on the List Notes button Place a check next to any note that you want to delete then select Delete Notes from the pull down menu Mail Filters By applying rules based on message headers or content mail fil
361. which new data is added and current data is changed or updated As a result your idb system maximizes the amount of historical data that is backed up Durability you can backup data on the hard drive continuously without worry ing that the drive will wear out Continuous Backup you can backup data in any sequence and as often as every 15 minutes Hot Swap the ability to add and remove idb backup cartridges while the server is running This means that you can swap idb disks without turning the server off Please Note Hot Swap capability is only supported on SCSI and specific IDE system config urations Configuring idb Nitix s idb feature automatically backs up your data throughout the entire day takes care of all backup tasks for you and notifies you via email about its progress Although most of the idb process is automated you can adjust several parameters that determine how and when your backups are completed 1 Select Backup from the Server Setup menu found on the left side of any WebConfig screen The following screen displays BACKUP SETUP Enable hackup compression smaller slower Backup every Day begins at E Mail backup reports to E Mail log level SAVE CHANGES T BACKUP FILES RESTORE FILES 2 Indicate whether or not you want to enable backup compression As a general rule com pressed backup runs half as fast as a non compressed backup but stores twice as muc
362. work window displays Click on the OK button again 7 Reboot the workstation The next time you log on the login window will have an addi tional Domain field Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 107 NT Domain Services For Windows 2000 1 In Windows select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The Control Panel displays f 3 34x Potas Took Help 5 co X ech ars ioy y EK x Oh Adress corra Porat z ee my Computer Select System from the list The System Properties window displays Click on the Net work Identification tab General Network Idertiicaton Hardware Uses Fries Advanced Windows uses the following information to idantly your computer n the network Ful computer name esr Workgroup WORKGROUP To use the Network identhicabon Wizard to on a Network doman and create a local user chick Nehwo ID Nemo To rename this computer or join a domain cick Properties 8 3 Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 108 NT Domain Services 3 Click on the Properties button The Identification Changes window displays Identification Changes You can change the name and the merberihip of the computer Changes may affect accer to network rerources Conga name Een Ful computer name testwin2k More J Mombes of G Doman MAINOFFICE C Workgroup Lem Inthe Member of section of the window select Domain Enter the name of the domain as entered in the Windows wo
363. you want to enable the Domain Member or Domain Control ler feature Please Note You cannot act as a Domain Member and a Domain Controller at the same time 6 If appropriate enable the Act as Domain Member feature by selecting Yes Please Note If you choose Nitix to act as a Domain Member ensure that you have disabled Act as Domain Controller and Domain Controller Enable roaming profiles 7 Enter your Domain Member Admin username this is your Windows NT administrator name 8 Enter your Domain Member Admin password this is your Windows NT administrator password Re enter your password to ensure it was entered correctly 9 If appropriate enable the Domain Controller The Windows File Server will then act as the Windows domain controller The Windows workgroup name will then become your network Domain Name Please Note If you choose to have Nitix act as a Domain Controller ensure that you have disabled the Act as Domain Member feature Please Note The Windows File Server must be enabled for the Domain Controller to function See Chapter 10 NT Domain Services for more information Please Note Your network domain name has nothing to do with your internet domain name They do not interact and are independent of each other Advice Recommendation Do not use the same internet domain name as your local network domain name Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 89 File Services 10 Enter an administrative passwor
364. ys houses the hard disk s m Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 12 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator 9 Hard disk key lock locks the face plate preventing physical access 10 Control panel contains the display panel and all control buttons 11 Display panel displays the status of the Net Integrator 12 Direction arrows used to execute commands from the control panel 13 Enter and Cancel buttons used to execute commands from the control panel 14 Backup and Restore buttons used to initiate backup and restore procedures Back View Please Note The image above corresponds to our Mark and Mark Il models 1 Power socket where the power cord is connected Serial port for an external dial up modem Extra ports reserved for future use Ethernet Port 0 used to connect to the local area network LAN Ethernet Port 1 used to connect to a LAN segment or to the Internet Ethernet Port 2 used to connect to a LAN segment or to the Internet D 9 95 dx M Power supply fan provides cooling for internal components Nitix User Manual Version 4 0 13 First time Nitix Setup Net Integrator 8 Primary cooling fan provides additional cooling for internal components 9 Parallel printer port used for a shared printer Micro Front View Please Note The image above corresponds to our Micro model 1 USB Port reserved for future use

User Manual - Computer Magic

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents